Lexus OM30C11U
User Manual: Lexus 2011 Lexus GS350 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 652 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mir-
rors, and steering column
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information
3Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-your-
self maintenance, and maintenance information
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information
7For owners Reporting safety defects for US owners and seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start.......................... 29
Wireless remote control............... 41
Doors.................................................... 43
Trunk..................................................... 48
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 53
Driving position memory
system ............................................... 55
Head restraints................................. 60
Seat belts ............................................ 63
Steering wheel.................................. 70
Inside rear view mirror.................... 71
Outside rear view mirrors........... 73
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows................................ 75
Moon roof .......................................... 78
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ....................... 85
Alarm.................................................... 87
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............... 90
SRS airbags ....................................... 92
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 104
Child restraint systems ............... 109
Installing child restraints............... 113
1Before driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 124
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 133
Automatic transmission.............. 137
Turn signal lever ............................ 142
Parking brake ................................. 143
Horn.................................................... 144
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ..................... 145
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 149
Multi-information display........... 152
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............................ 155
Fog light switch .............................. 158
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 159
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 164
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ................................ 165
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 169
Intuitive parking assist .................. 181
Rear view monitor system......... 194
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension System).................. 198
Driving assist systems.................. 199
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ........... 206
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage...................... 213
Vehicle load limits.......................... 217
Winter driving tips ........................ 218
Trailer towing................................. 223
Dinghy towing ............................... 224
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen ................................. 228
Setting the touch screen ........... 235
2When driving
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-2. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................................ 246
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers ............ 255
Windshield wiper de-icer......... 256
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type ....................... 257
Using the radio............................. 260
Using the CD/DVD
player.............................................. 269
Playing an audio CD................... 272
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs.................................. 276
Playing DVD video/audio
(with DVD player).................... 280
Playing a video CD
(with DVD player)..................... 294
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information............. 297
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio.............................................. 308
Listening to a USB
memory/iPod .............................. 316
Optimal use of the
audio/video system.................. 326
Using the AUX port................... 328
Using the steering
switches......................................... 329
3-4. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................... 332
Using a Bluetooth®
phone ............................................ 338
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone).................. 353
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 382
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features.............. 385
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors......................................... 393
Vanity mirrors................................ 394
Clock................................................ 395
Outside temperature
display ............................................ 396
Ashtrays ........................................... 397
Cigarette lighter.......................... 398
Power outlet................................... 399
Seat heaters/ventilators........... 400
Armrest ............................................ 402
Rear sunshade.............................. 403
Floor mats....................................... 406
Trunk features............................... 408
Garage door opener..................... 411
Compass........................................... 418
Safety Connect ............................. 422
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 430
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................... 433
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements............................... 436
General maintenance............... 438
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ....................................... 441
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 442
Hood ................................................. 445
Positioning a floor jack............... 446
Engine compartment.................. 448
Tires ................................................... 463
Tire inflation pressure................. 473
Wheels ............................................. 477
Air conditioning filter.................. 479
Electronic key battery................ 482
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................ 484
Headlight aim ............................... 509
Light bulbs........................................ 512
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ................... 520
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................... 521
If you think something is
wrong............................................ 530
Fuel pump shut off system......... 531
Event data recorder.................... 532
4Maintenance and care
5When trouble arises
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds............................................ 534
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 544
If you have a flat tire
(Vehicles with standard
tires)................................................ 557
If you have a flat tire
(Vehicles with run-flat
tires)................................................ 567
If the engine will not start ......... 568
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”.......................... 569
If you lose your keys.................... 570
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ........................ 571
If the 12 volt battery is
discharged ................................... 574
If your vehicle overheats ........... 578
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................. 581
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.................................. 582
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).................... 584
Fuel information........................... 599
Tire information............................. 602
6-2. Customization
Customizable features................ 616
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 622
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 624
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 625
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 627
6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
8
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Headlight (high beam) and daytime
running light
P. 155, 156
Pictorial index Exterior
Turn signal light
P. 142
Fog light
P. 158
Side turn signal light
P. 142
Headlight (low beam)
P. 155
Hood
P. 445
Parking light
P. 155
Windshield wipers
P. 159
Moon roof
P. 78
Outside rear view
mirror
P. 73
Side marker light
P. 155
10
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
A
Pictorial index Interior
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 92
SRS knee airbags
P. 92
Floor mat
P. 406
Front seat
P. 53
SRS side airbag
P. 92
Console box
P. 388
Power outlet
P. 399
Ashtray
P. 397
Cup holders
P. 391
Armrest
P. 402
SRS driver airbag
P. 92
Seat belt
P. 63
Door pocket
P. 392
Head restraint
P. 60
AUX port
P. 328
USB port
P. 316
11
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Compass
P. 418
Garage door opener switches
P. 411
Inside rear view mirror
P. 71
Personal light
P. 384
Moon roof switch
P. 78
Interior light
P. 383
Vanity mirror
P. 394
Personal light
P. 384
Interior light
P. 383
Sun visor
P. 393
SRS curtain shield airbag
P. 92
A
SOS button
P. 422
Overhead console
P. 389
: If equipped
14
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 155
P. 142
P. 158
Gauges and meters
P. 145
Multi-information display
P. 152
Windshield wipers and
washer switch
P. 159
Parking brake pedal
P. 143
Trunk opener main switch
P. 48
Glove box
P. 387
Hood lock release lever
P. 445
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 133
Trunk opener
P. 48
Fuel filler door opener
P. 82
Horn
P. 144
Pre-collision braking off switch
P. 206
15
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Audio remote control switches
P. 329
Cruise control switch
P. 165, 169
Telephone switch
P. 332
“DISP” switch
P. 153
Distance switch
P. 172
Talk switch*
P. 347
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
A
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch
P. 70
16
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
P. 255
Emergency flashers
P. 520
Air conditioning
system
P. 246
Audio system
P. 257
Navigation system*
Touch screen
P. 228
Security indicator
P. 85, 87
Clock
P. 395
Outside temperature display
P. 396
B
17
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
“AFS OFF” switch
P. 156
Rear sunshade switch
P. 403
Headlight cleaner switch
P. 164
Intuitive parking assist switch
P. 181
Odometer/trip meter and
trip meter reset buttons
P. 146
Instrument panel light control
P. 146
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 73
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
C
18
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-
ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-
ranty.
19
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, dynamic radar cruise control system, cruise control system,
anti-lock brake system, vehicle dynamics integrated management, SRS airbag sys-
tem and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for
precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
20
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■General precautions regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
21
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and
other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
22
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Before driving 1
23
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-1. Key information
Keys............................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start.................... 29
Wireless remote control.......... 41
Doors ............................................ 43
Trunk ............................................ 48
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats................................... 53
Driving position memory
system........................................ 55
Head restraints.......................... 60
Seat belts ..................................... 63
Steering wheel........................... 70
Inside rear view mirror ............. 71
Outside rear view mirrors...... 73
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 75
Moon roof................................... 78
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system.................. 85
Alarm............................................ 87
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 90
SRS airbags ................................ 92
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 104
Child restraint systems ......... 109
Installing child restraints........ 113
24
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 29 )
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 41 )
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■Card key (if equipped)
Electronic key
Operating the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start
(P. 29 )
Mechanical key
25
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the smart
access system with push-button
start does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 571)
26
1-1. Key information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Card key
●The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
●If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
●The card key is not waterproof.
■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF, lock the glove box and trunk storage exten-
sion door as circumstances demand. (P. 48, 3 87 )
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 570 )
●To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it inside while pressing the lock
release button.
●If the battery cover is not installed and the
battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, rein-
stall the battery with the positive terminal
facing the Lexus emblem.
27
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio system, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-fre-
quency therapy equipment.
28
1-1. Key information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Precautions for handling the card keys
●Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
●If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card
key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
●Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
●If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
●When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rap-
idly.
●The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
29
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 30)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 30)
Starts and stops the engine (P. 133)
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlock-
ing the doors
The system can be oper-
ated when the electronic
key is within about 2.3 ft.
(70 cm) of an outside door
handle. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be
operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be oper-
ated when the electronic
key is within about 2.3 ft.
(70 cm) of the trunk
release button.
When starting the engine
or changing modes
The system can be oper-
ated when the electronic
key is inside the vehicle.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the fol-
lowing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wire-
less remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly:
(Way of coping: P. 57 1)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,
, or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Multi-information
display Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver’s door handle
to unlock only the driver’s
door Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Rings once
Hold a passenger’s door han-
dle to unlock all the doors
Hold the door handle to
unlock the front and rear
doors on your side
Exterior: Beeps 4 times
Interior: Rings once
Hold the door handle to
unlock the door
Exterior: Beeps once
Interior: Rings once
Hold a door handle to unlock
all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Rings once
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 87 )
■Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●When the entry function has not been used for a month or more
●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function
(P. 41) or the mechanical key (P. 571)
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 37 )
●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-but-
ton start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when nec-
essary. ( P. 4 82)
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
•Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
STEP 3
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■Note for the smart access system with push-button start
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective
range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds
if the doors are not opened and closed.)
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
smart access system with push-button start. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may pre-
vent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle
again.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the theft deterrent system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 554 )
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
and all doors are locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle with
the electronic key and lock
the doors without first turning
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Tu r n t h e “ E N G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle using
the entry function while a
door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without shift-
ing the shift lever to “P”
Shift the shift lever to
“P”.
Interior alarm rings
continuously
Switched to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s door
is open (Opened the driver’s
door when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode.)
Tu r n t h e “ E N G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door.
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the
driver’s door is open
Close the driver’s door.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 57 1 )
●Starting the engine: P. 572
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 48 2
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 61 6 )
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14AEM
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZL
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZT
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 3 1 ) The
radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the smart
access system with push-button start can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for
details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the smart access
system with push-button start.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the smart access system with push-but-
ton start.
41
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Wireless remote control
■Operation signals
●Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
●Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
●Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and
moon roof are opening.
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if an
attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pushing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pushing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks
the other doors.
Opens the windows and
moon roof (push and hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (P. 87 )
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Security feature
P. 37
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 571)
●Starting the engine. (P. 572 )
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 35
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 48 2
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 33
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. 2-step unlocking function, trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 616)
■Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
43
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the smart access system with
push-button start, wireless remote control or door lock switch.
■Smart access system with push-button start
P. 30
■Wireless remote control
P. 41
■Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in the
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on rear door
switches to lock the rear doors.
STEP 1
STEP 2
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 sec-
onds.)
Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”,
press and hold the driver’s door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and then
release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired func-
tion to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 1
STEP 2
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
Function Shift lever position Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door locking
function “P”
Shift position linked door unlock-
ing function
Speed linked door locking function
“N”
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
■Closing the front doors from outside with the inside lock button set in the locked
position
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left in the vehicle. (How-
ever, depending on the key’s location, the system may not be able to detect it. In
these instances the door lock protection function will not operate properly.)
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 57 1)
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 618)
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Trunk
Canceling the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box OFF to disable the trunk
opener.
ON
OFF
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote con-
trol or the smart access system
with push- button start.
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, smart access system with
push-button start or wireless remote control.
■Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
■Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Smart access system with push-button start
P. 30
Wireless remote control
P. 41
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Tr u n k ea sy cl o s er
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open (not latched properly), the trunk
easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■Tr u n k li ght
When the trunk light switch is set to ON, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is
opened.
■Tr u n k ha ndle
■Internal trunk release lever
ON
OFF
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 571 )
■Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the
trunk opener main switch
P. 26
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in
the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk
lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
●Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
●The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unex-
pectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
●When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Tr u n k ea sy cl o s er
NOTICE
■To prevent trunk easy closer malfunction
Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It takes
several seconds before the trunk easy closer
begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fin-
gers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this
may cause bone fractures or other serious
injuries.
53
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback dur-
ing a rear-end collision, the front
portion of the head restraint moves
slightly forward and upward to
help reduce the risk of whiplash on
the seat occupant.
Seat position fore/aft control switch
Seatback angle control switch
Seat cushion (front) angle control switch
Vertical height control switch
Lumbar support control switch
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Active head restraints
■When the active head restraint has been operated
If the active head restraint has been operated, you will not be able to return it to its
original position.
After operation, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Reclining adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, during an accident the lap belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Even small forces applied to the seatback
may cause the head restraint to move.
During
rear-end
collision
55
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Driving position memory system
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer’s
memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this
function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the
position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized. (if equipped)
■Entering a position to memory
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pushed, push
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the
signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3STEP 3
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Using the wireless remote control
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF and close the
driver’s door.
While pushing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), push on the
wireless remote control until the
signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the memorized position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pushed,
the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 87 )
Using the door lock switch
Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link
the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving
position cannot be linked properly.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF mode and close
the driver’s door.
While pushing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), push the lock or
unlock side on the door lock
switch (either the driver or passen-
ger side) until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Close the driver’s door with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch set to
the OFF.
Push the “SET” button and the button on the wireless remote control
at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps.
■Retained accessory power
With front passenger’s seat memory
●Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column)
can be recalled within 3 minutes after the corresponding side door is opened,
even if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF.
●Driver’s side: Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column) can be recalled within 60 seconds after the driver’s door is closed,
even if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF.
Without front passenger’s seat memory
●Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column)
can be recalled within 3 minutes after the driver’s door is opened, even if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF.
●Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column)
can be recalled within 60 seconds after the driver’s door is closed, even if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF.
■If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made
The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or
“3”) again.
■If the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased
when the 12 volt battery is disconnected.
STEP 1
STEP 2
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger
or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position
memory button.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
■Vertical adjustment
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraint up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Outboard rear seats
Up
Pull the head restraint up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Center rear seat
Up
Pull the head restraint up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Lock release button
Lock release button
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
■Removing and installing the front seat head restraints
For removal and installation, ask your Lexus dealer.
■Horizontal adjustment (Outboard rear seats)
Grip head restraint and twist to
tilt forward or backward.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Removing the head restraints (except for the front seats)
■Installing the head restraints (except for the front seats)
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
63
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)
If the shoulder belt fits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Up
Down
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal colli-
sion.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the effectiveness
of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses con-
trol of the vehicle. (P. 2 06 )
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and
you can move around fully. Also, when retracting, if the belt is locked, pulling once
on the belt strongly will loosen the belt and allow you to move, and the belt can then
be pulled out.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 113)
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 6 3)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriately for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 109)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 63 regarding seat belt usage.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 63)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoul-
der and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suf-
fer death or serious injury as a result of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or a collision.
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious
injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at the same time, including children.
●Lexus recommends that children should be seated in the rear seat and always use
a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a person-
alized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoul-
der. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 6 4 )
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt
does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of a seat belt.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-
dling of the pretensioner may cause it to activate or operate improperly and may
cause death or serious injury.
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
■Precaution for pre-collision seat belts
Do not rely solely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay atten-
tion to the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Steering wheel
Auto tilt away and auto return
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
71
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Inside rear view mirror
In the auto mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
Without navigation system
Turns auto mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
auto mode is turned on.
The mirror is automatically set
to auto whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
IGNITION ON mode.
With navigation system
Auto mode on
Auto mode off
The indicator comes on when
auto mode is turned on.
The mirror is automatically set
to auto whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
IGNITION ON mode.
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Adjusting the height of the rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■To prevent sensor error
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
To ensure correct functioning of the sensors,
do not touch or cover the sensors.
73
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding and extending the mirrors
Press the switch
Pressing again will extend the mir-
rors.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select the mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror heaters to defog the mirrors. (P. 255)
■Auto anti-glare function
When the inside rear view mirror is set to auto mode, the outside rear view mirrors
will activate in conjunction with the inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light.
(P. 7 1)
■Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (neither “L” nor
“R” selected).
■One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 55)
CAUTION
■While driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in losing control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Before driving, be sure to extend mirrors and make an adjustment properly.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by
the moving mirror.
■When the mirror heaters are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
75
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock pas-
senger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
■The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Linked door lock window operation
●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 57 1 )
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control if custom-
ized at your Lexus dealer. (P. 41 )
76
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s or front passenger’s door
is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the rel-
evant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
77
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 61 8)
CAUTION
■When closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
78
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Moon roof
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■Opening and closing
Open
Stops just before it is opened
fully. Press the switch again to
fully open.
Close
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
■Tilt up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
79
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Linked door lock moon roof operation
●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 571)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control if customized
at your Lexus dealer.* (P. 41)
*: This function cannot be customized unless power window operation using the
wireless remote control is enabled.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically
Keep the close switch depressed.
■To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened automatically (just before fully opened position).
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
80
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 sec-
ond. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up
position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch
again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up posi-
tion.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have
to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for
approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check
to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
81
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 61 8)
CAUTION
■When opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■When closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
82
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Press the fuel filler door opener
switch.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
83
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap clockwise until you hear a
click. The cap will revolve slightly in
the opposite direction once
released.
■Fuel types
Use premium unleaded gasoline. (Octane Rating 91 [Research Octane Number
96] or higher)
■Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 Imp.gal.)
■When the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the 12 volt
battery is discharged or for any other reason.
84
1-5. Refueling
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressur-
ized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.
85
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object.
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle.
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is oper-
ating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
86
1-6. Theft deterrent system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
87
1
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
●A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than by using the smart access system with push-button start,
wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock
again automatically.)
●The hood is opened.
■Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all doors.
The system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
●Unlock the doors or trunk.
●Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
88
1-6. Theft deterrent system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Tr i g g er in g o f t he a larm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
●The 12 volt battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is locked.
89
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the 12 volt battery is disconnected before canceling the alarm, the system may be
triggered when the battery is reconnected.
■Alarm-operated door lock
●When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
●Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12 volt
battery.
■Panic mode
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
When is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermit-
tently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter
any person from trying to break into or dam-
age your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
90
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 53)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 53 )
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily opera-
ble.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 70 )
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 60)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 63 )
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
92
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-
ger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbag
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Front side airbag/rear side airbag (rear side airbags are optional)
Can help protect the torso of the front occupants and rear out-
board occupants.
93
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Airbag system components
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Knee airbag
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbag
Front side airbag
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensor
Curtain shield and rear side
airbag sensor
SRS warning light
Rear side airbag (if equipped)
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Driver’s seat position sensor
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensor
Curtain shield airbag
Can help protect primarily the head of front occupants and rear out-
board occupants.
94
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED AIRBAGS” designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver’s seat position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS air-
bag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sen-
sor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For vehicles with Safety Connect: For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS
airbags deploy or in the event of a severe collision, the system is designed to
send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s
location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt
to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance
required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency
services. (P. 422)
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -
18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
●It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate, if there is not passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy, if
luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccu-
pied. (P. 1 0 4)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield air-
bags)
●The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle ori-
entation at an approximately speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front side airbag on
the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fas-
tened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 104)
96
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal colli-
sion. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
97
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are generally not designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
98
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel, front
passenger airbag cover or lower portion of
the instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-
taining the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may
cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many driv-
ers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the
way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining
the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still main-
taining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
100
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 1 09)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s
seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will
judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt
even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
102
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 93. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steer-
ing wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel. These items can become
projectiles when SRS driver, front passen-
ger and knee airbags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and may
cause death or serious injury, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-
out consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rail
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
104
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B A G
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag
Activated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B A G
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
106
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Unoccupied
■System malfunction
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Not
illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A I R B A G
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a large child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 1 0 9)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 113)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger air-
bag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a
collision.
108
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear seat.
●Do not let a rear seat passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-
rectly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the pas-
senger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 113 )
●Do not modify or remove the front seat.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction in the detection sys-
tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
109
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-
ate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 113)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
110
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 6 3)
CAUTION
■Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not properly
secure the infant or child, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-
shield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possi-
ble and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
112
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side air-
bags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
113
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not com-
patible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outboard rear seats.
(Buttons displaying the location
of the anchors are attached to
the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt)
Anchor bracket
(for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
114
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seat-
back slightly.
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seat-
back slightly.
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
116
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
118
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fully extend the shoulder strap and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 120)
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
119
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 6 3)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
STEP 1
STEP 2
120
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt or lower anchors,
and move the head restraint in
place at the lowest position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 66)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-
gers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it
does not interfere with the child restraint
system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat, move
the seat as far back as possible even if the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated. Failing to do so may result in death
or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
122
1-7. Safety information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from
the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so
may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
●Ensure the belt and tab are securely locked and that the seat belt is not twisted.
●Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it
is secure.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden stop, sudden swerve
or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden
swerve or accident.
When driving 2
123
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 124
Engine (ignition) switch......... 133
Automatic transmission ........ 137
Turn signal lever....................... 142
Parking brake........................... 143
Horn............................................ 144
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................ 145
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 149
Multi-information display..... 152
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch ..................... 155
Fog light switch........................ 158
Windshield wipers and
washer..................................... 159
Headlight cleaner switch ..... 164
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control.......................... 165
Dynamic radar cruise
control...................................... 169
Intuitive parking assist............ 181
Rear view monitor
system...................................... 194
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension System) ............ 198
Driving assist systems............ 199
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)...... 206
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ................ 213
Vehicle load limits................... 217
Winter driving tips.................. 218
Trailer towing .......................... 223
Dinghy towing......................... 224
124
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
Starting on a steep incline
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■Starting the engine (P. 1 33 )
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.
(P. 137 )
Release the parking brake. (P. 143)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accel-
erator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to “P”. (P. 1 3 7)
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 143)
Shift the shift lever to “P”. (P. 1 3 7 )
Stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
125
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
●For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low range in the “S” position.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or
whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding-down.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 587)
■When starting on an incline
The hill-start assist control may operate. (P. 1 99)
■Overheating
Your vehicle may overheat under the following extreme driving conditions:
●When driving on a long uphill road in hot weather
●Suddenly decelerating or stopping the vehicle immediately after high-speed
driving
126
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals prop-
erly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-
dent.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a
fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.
Doing so may cause the engine not to operate or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed.
Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an acci-
dent, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
127
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P”, “R” or “N” while the
vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the automatic transmission and may
result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake not to operate properly and lead to an
accident.
●Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake actuator (GS460) or brake booster (GS350) will
not operate properly if the engine is off.
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-
tiveness. (P. 139 )
●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
●Be careful when driving on slippery surfaces, as the vehicle may spin or skid when
downshifting, rapidly accelerating, braking or turning.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any positions other than “P” or “N” the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the
vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result
in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Failure to do so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical com-
ponents.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the engine and
lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odor-
less. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehi-
cle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
130
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the brake actuator (GS460) or brake booster (GS350) does not operate, do
not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require brak-
ing.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if turning the engine off.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
●The brake system consists of 3 (GS460) or 2 (GS350) individual hydraulic sys-
tems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake
pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes
longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
■If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (4WD models)
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in
sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the
vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
131
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■While driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving.
If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal
depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals
together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional
brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you
also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
132
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 5 60)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, automatic
transmission, transfer (4WD models), differentials, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
133
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine can be started
from any mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
134
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than “P” when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the engine does not start
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 85)
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not
running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent bat-
tery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine
is not running.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 35
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 48 2
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 33
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a mes-
sage will be shown on the multi-information
display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
136
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelera-
tor pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods if the engine is not running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race the engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
■Shift position uses
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
“D” position for normal driving.
*2: By selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking
forces.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle or starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
S“S” mode driving*2 (P. 139)
138
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Selecting a driving mode
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration and
driving in mountainous regions.
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving on
slippery road surfaces, such as
on snow.
Press “SNOW” to return to nor-
mal mode.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Changing shift ranges in “S” mode
Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
GS460
The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “6”, “5” or “4”
according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set
to “3” or “2” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in
the “D” position. (P. 141)
GS350
The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “4” according
to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3” or
“2” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the “D”
position. (P. 141)
140
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Shift ranges and their functions
●You can choose from 8 levels (GS460) or 6 levels (GS350) of
engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
●If you accelerate while in ranges “1” to “7” (GS460) or “1” to “5”
(GS350), the shift range may automatically range up in accordance
with the vehicle’s speed.
●A higher shift range is automatically selected when the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is high.
■“S” mode
●When the shift range is “6” (GS460) or “4” (GS350) or lower, holding the shift
lever toward “+” sets the shift range to “8” (GS460) or “6” (GS350).
●To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the “S” mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
■When driving with the cruise control system (or dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem)
The engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “7”,
“6”, “5” or “4” (GS460) or “5” or “4” (GS350). (P. 165, 169)
■Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode after driving in snow mode.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
P. 569
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to “S”
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.)
■AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the
driver’s input and driving conditions.
GS460: The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the “D” or
“S” position.
GS350: The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the “D”
position. (Shifting the shift lever to the “S” position cancels the function.)
While in power mode, the engine speed may stay high while depressing the accel-
erator pedal and may remain high after releasing the accelerator pedal. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
142
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Parking brake
■Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 2 18)
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-
heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
CanadaU.S.A.
144
2-1. Driving procedures
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
145
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target
region.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Multi-information display
P. 152
146
2-2. Instrument cluster
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
M
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset buttons
Changes the display
Resets the trip meter driving
range to “0”.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights excluding the clock and out-
side temperature display, can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
Maximum brightness
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was
last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display differ-
ent distances independently.
147
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Light sensitive optitron meter
To reduce glare or reflection of the instrument cluster, the cluster glass is
tinted automatically or manually. You can select a setting from 7 modes.
Display the present setting, then
change the mode.
To change the mode, press the but-
ton once and then again within 6
seconds.
Each time you press the button, the
mode changes in the following
order:
1. “AUTO - Norm.”
2. “AUTO - Lo”
3. “AUTO - Hi”
4. “MANUAL - 1”
5. “MANUAL - 2”
6. “MANUAL - 3”
7. “MANUAL - 4”
Mode 1 to 3: The cluster glass tint
will be adjusted automatically
depending on the intensity of sun-
light in the surrounding.
Mode 4 to 7: The cluster glass tint
will be fixed when a certain level of
sunlight is reached in the surround-
ing.
(“Norm.” to “Hi”, “1” to “4” referring
to the level of cluster glass tint.)
148
2-2. Instrument cluster
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 578 )
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
■To activate the light sensitivity function properly
Do not affix a sticker or window tint to the rear window glass, or put an object
behind the rear seat.
149
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depend-
ing on the target region.
Center panel
150
2-2. Instrument cluster
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehi-
cle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 142)
(if equipped)
“SPORT” mode indicator
(P. 198)
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P. 155 )
Shift position and shift
range indicators
(P. 139)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 155)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 165, 169)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 155)
(if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (P. 182)
Fog light indicator
(P. 158) Slip indicator (P. 200 )
(if equipped)
“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 156)
Slip off indicator
(P. 201)
“ECT SNOW” indicator
(P. 138)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicators
(P. 104)
“ECT PWR” indicator
(P. 138)
*
*
*
*
151
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you turn to IGNITION ON mode, this could mean that these sys-
tems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if
this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated
vehicle’s systems. (P. 53 4 )
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (GS460)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
(if equipped)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
152
2-2. Instrument cluster
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data, including the current driving range.
●Trip information (P. 153)
Displays driving range, fuel con-
sumption and other cruising
related information.
●Intuitive parking assist dis-
play (if equipped) (P. 183)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
●Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol display (if equipped)
(P. 169)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise con-
trol.
●Warning messages
(P. 544)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
153
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Trip information
■Driving range
■Average fuel consumption
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch
for longer than one second when the average fuel con-
sumption is displayed.
Display items can be switched
by pushing the “DISP” switch.
154
2-2. Instrument cluster
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Current fuel consumption
■Outside temperature
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
■System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check
is complete, “COMPLETED” is displayed before returning to the normal screen.
NOTICE
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-
tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
155
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the head-
lights on or off.
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights, daytime
running lights and all the
lights listed above turn
on and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode.)
The daytime running
lights turn on.
U.S.A. Canada
156
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System) (if equipped)
AFS improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically
adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the
degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■Deactivating AFS
Press the switch to turn it off.
The indicator turns on when
the AFS is deactivated.
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on auto-
matically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking
brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
157
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Headlight control sensor
■Automatic light off system
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after all doors are closed if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or
turned OFF while the headlights are turned on. (The lights turn off immediately if
the button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
off once and then back to the or position.
■Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■If the indicator flashes...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 61 9)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
158
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
OFF
ON
159
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Windshield wipers and washer
Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when
is selected).
Off
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed wind-
shield wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
160
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
With selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper
timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation
161
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
162
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph
(170 km/h).
■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not “AUTO” mode.
●Intermittent wiper interval ( mode)
●Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention
wiper sweep occurs)
With selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermit-
tent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
■Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
●If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show
that “AUTO” mode is activated.
●If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 167°F (75°C) or higher, or 14°F
(-10°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
163
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 620)
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
164
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Headlight cleaner switch
■The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight
switch is turned ON.
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually, as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
: If equipped
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
165
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelera-
tor.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■Set the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed
can be made by lightly pressing
the lever up or down and releas-
ing it.
■Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brake pedal is
depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in the D or “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” or “8” (GS460) or “4”, “5”, or “6”
(GS350) range of S has been selected.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●Enhanced VSC is activated
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●On winding roads
●When emergency towing
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
Distance switch
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Set the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button
to activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate.
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
171
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Press the “ON-OFF” button
to activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(Push the lever away from
you and hold for approxi-
mately 1 second.)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode is always reset when
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is switched to IGNITION
ON mode.
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is displayed.
In the constant speed control
mode, fine adjustment of the set
speed can be made by lightly
pressing the lever up or down
and releasing it.
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brake pedal is
depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
■Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each pull of the switch changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is set to
the IGNITION ON mode.
A mark will be displayed to indi-
cate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
Preceding
vehicle mark
173
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long down-
hill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the sys-
tem automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in
the lane ahead
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient auto-
matic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.
Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 547)
■Switching modes
The mode cannot be switched to constant speed control mode if vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode has been used. The mode also cannot be switched from
constant speed control to vehicle-to-vehicle control mode. Turn the system off by
pressing the “ON-OFF” button, and turn it on again.
175
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Dynamic radar cruise can be set when
●The shift lever is in D. (Recommended)
Dynamic radar cruise control can also be set when the shift lever is in the S posi-
tion and range “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” or “8” (GS460) or “4”, “5” or “6” (GS350) has
been selected.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●Enhanced VSC is activated
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed
●The mode select switch is set to snow mode
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the “ON-
OFF” button on again.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Automatically canceling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
●Actual vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●Enhanced VSC is activated
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
■Approach warning
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle’s speed
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
●Immediately after the cruise control speed has been set
●At the instant the accelerator is applied
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)
Medium Approximately 150 ft. (45 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
Grille cover
Radar sensor
177
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est suscepti-
ble de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
178
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■To avoid operating the dynamic radar cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep downhills, where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
●When the approach warning buzzer can be heard often
●When emergency towing
179
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the prox-
imity alarm (P. 552) will not be activated, and a serious or fatal accident may
result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a serious or fatal accident may
result.
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
180
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sen-
sor not to function correctly and could result in a serious or fatal accident.
●Stick or attach anything to them
●Leave them dirty
●Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
●Modify or paint them
●Replace them with non-genuine parts
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
181
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Intuitive parking assist
: If equipped
Intuitive parking assist uses sensors in the front and rear of the vehicle to
detect the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles, and informs the
driver of this distance using the multi-information display, the touch screen,
and warning beeps.
The system may be used at speeds less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
■Sensor types
Dual sensors
There are 4 sensors installed in the front bumper, two in the center section
to detect obstacles directly ahead, and one in each corner of the bumper,
to detect obstacles in those areas.
The dual sensors detect obstacles ahead of the vehicle, and judge whether
avoidance maneuvers are necessary (whether the obstacle will come
within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle), according to the distance between
the obstacle and the vehicle, and the steering wheel position. The screen
display and beeps will change accordingly.
Rear corner sensors
These sensors detect obstacles around the rear corners of the vehicle.
Back sensors
These sensors detect obstacles behind the vehicle.
182
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Intuitive parking assist switch
Press the switch to turn the
system on/off.
If the intuitive parking assist is
turned on, the indicator light will
come on, and the system will
operate under the following
conditions:
• The dual sensors will oper-
ate if the shift lever is in a
position other than “R” or
“P”.
• All corner sensors and the
back sensors will operate if
the shift lever is in “R”.
183
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Multi-information display and touch screen
If the sensors detect an obstacle, it is displayed on the multi-information
display in the instrument cluster.
You can change the conditions under which information is displayed on
the touch screen. (P. 245)
Multi-information display
Dual sensor detection
Steering guide symbol
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
Touch screen
Dual sensor detection
Steering guide symbol
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
If the intuitive parking assist is
operated while the rear view moni-
tor is showing, the intuitive parking
assist will be shown in the upper
right corner of the screen.
(P. 186)
184
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance and beeps
When the intuitive parking assist is activated, the approximate distance to
the obstacle is displayed. Also, if an obstacle with which a collision is pos-
sible is detected, a warning beep will sound.
■Dual sensor
• If the shift lever is in “R”, only the corner sensors will detect obstacles.
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
Multi-informa-
tion display
To u c h scree n
With beeps
(danger of
collision)
No beeps
(no danger of
collision)
3.0 ft. (100 cm)
to 1.5 ft. (50 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)
Less than
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(blinking) (continuous)
185
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Rear corner sensor
■Back sensor
Approximate distance
to obstacle
Multi-information
display Touch scre e n
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
Less than
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(blinking) (continuous)
Approximate distance
to obstacle
Multi-information
display Touch scre e n
5.0 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.4 ft. (45 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
1.4 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking) (continuous)
186
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Touch screen (insert display)
Dual sensor (corner) detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
The tire display and the steering
guide symbol will not be displayed.
■Dual sensor
Approximate distance
to obstacle
With beeps
(danger of collision)
No beeps
(no danger of collision)
3.0 ft. (100 cm) to
1.5 ft. (50 cm)
(blinking slowly) (continuous)
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
(blinking) (continuous)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(blinking rapidly) (continuous)
Less than
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(continuous)
187
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Rear corner sensor
■Back sensor
Approximate distance to obstacle To u c h scree n
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
(blinking)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(blinking rapidly)
Less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(continuous)
Approximate distance to obstacle To u c h scree n
5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(blinking slowly)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft. (45 cm)
(blinking)
1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking rapidly)
Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous)
188
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Steering guide symbol
Displays the steering maneuvers required to avoid an obstacle. Move the
steering wheel in the direction shown by the arrow.
The steering guide symbol only
shows the maneuvers necessary to
avoid an obstacle.
When using the system, always
check your surroundings for
safety.
Beeps and obstacle distance
A beep sounds when an obstacle with which there is a danger of collision
is detected. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the interval of
the beep becomes shorter.
●When the following obstacle distances are reached, the beep changes
from intermittent to continuous:
• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the dual sensors or rear corner
sensors is less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm).
• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the back sensors is less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm).
●If obstacles are detected by the dual sensors in 2 places at once, or if
both rear corner sensors detect obstacles at the same time, the system
will sound a warning beep for the closer of the 2 obstacles.
189
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●If multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the
same time, the warning beep will change in the following manner:
• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear
of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is
detected near a different area of the vehicle, the warning beep will sound
6 beeps then one continuous beep.
• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear
of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is
detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warn-
ing beeps will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.
●You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (P. 245)
Obstacle detection range
About 10.0 ft. (300 cm)
About 3.0 ft. (100 cm)
About 5.0 ft. (150 cm)
About 1.5 ft. (50 cm)
The detection area of the sensors is
shown to the left.
If obstacles move too close to the
sensors, they will not be detected.
If the malfunction screen is dis-
played, the dual sensor detection
range will be shortened from 3.0 ft.
(100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in the IGNITION ON mode.
■When the system malfunctions
●If a malfunction occurs and no obstacles have been detected, a warning is dis-
played, and a malfunction beep sounds for 7 seconds.
If an obstacle has been detected, or another malfunction occurs in a different
sensor, the malfunction beeps will not sound.
●In the following circumstances the displayed warning will disappear:
• If you switch the screen to a different mode.
• If you turn off the intuitive parking assist main switch.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). Once the vehicle speed drops
below 6 mph (10 km/h), the warning will be displayed again.
●If the malfunction screen is displayed, the detection range of the dual sensors is
shortened. In this case, the necessity for obstacle evasion (whether the obstacle
will come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle or not) will not be calculated.
■When using the intuitive parking assist
●The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for-
ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides
of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
• The sensors’ detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front
and rear bumpers.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection dis-
tance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at
slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25
cm) of the vehicle before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Braking distance may differ according to the road conditions (rain, gravel
etc.).
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air
flow noise of air conditioning system.
• For long obstacles such as walls, the obstacle warning may change as the
obstacle gets closer.
191
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●In the following situations, the intuitive parking assist may not function correctly,
possibly leading to an accident.
• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensors. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor area is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnor-
mal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The vehicle angle is especially wide.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads, or over grass.
• If there is something producing ultrasonic waves nearby, such as another
vehicle’s horn, motorcycle engine noise, air braking sound from heavy-duty
vehicles, or another vehicle using the intuitive parking assist.
• In heavy rain, or if water is splashed on the sensors.
• If a commercial fender pole or radio antenna is installed.
• If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.
• If moving towards a high curb or a curb corner.
• Objects such as signs may cause the detection distance to shorten.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially,
but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
■Obstacles that may not be detected correctly
The following obstacles may not be detected.
●Thin objects such as wire, fencing or rope.
●Objects that absorb sound waves, such as cotton or snow.
●Objects with sharp corners.
●Objects where the upper section projects out over the lower section.
●Low objects.
■If the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 553
■Warning beep volume and touch screen settings
You can change the warning beep volume etc. (P. 245)
192
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
For vehicles sold in Canada
CAUTION
■While driving
To reduce the chance of injury in the event of an accident or sudden stop, keep the
switch box closed.
■When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
●The back sensors and rear corner sensors do not judge whether there is danger
of a collision, nor whether the obstacle can be avoided using the steering wheel.
When reversing, always check your surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety.
●The steering guide symbol (arrow) is an approximate guide regarding obstacles.
It is not driving instructions. When moving forward or reversing, always check
your surroundings for safety and drive carefully.
●Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas, as this may cause
the intuitive parking assist to function incorrectly, possibly leading to an accident.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
193
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■When using the intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor
malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
●A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch on.
●The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sound when no
obstacle has been detected.
●If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong
impact.
●If the bumper collides with something.
●If the display shows continuously without a beep.
■When changing tires
If you install tires of a size other than that recommended by the manufacturer, the
system will be unable to correctly detect steering wheel movement. Always use tire
sizes recommended by the manufacturer.
■When washing the vehicle
When washing the vehicle using high pressure cleaning equipment, do not spray
water directly on the sensors. Subjecting the sensors to high pressure impact may
cause a malfunction.
194
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Rear view monitor system
: If equipped
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.
Rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in “R”.
If you move the lever out of “R”,
the screen returns to the previ-
ous one.
195
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Displayed area
■Rear view monitor system camera
The area covered by the camera is limited.
Objects which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot be
seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road con-
ditions.
Corners of bumper
In the following cases, it may be difficult to
see the images on the screen, even when the
system is functioning correctly.
• In the dark (e.g. at night).
• If the temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
• If water droplets get on the camera, or
when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).
• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get
on the camera lens.
• If the sun or headlights are shining directly
into the camera lens.
196
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Smear effect
■Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, or mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
●Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
●Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
●Do not use the system if the trunk is open.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by
the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the
camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs
when a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have a
vertical streak above and below it.
197
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●If the back of the vehicle is hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may
change. Contact your Lexus dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
198
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)
: If equipped
AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions.
Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steer-
ing wheel operation in conjunction with VGRS (GS460), EPS and active
stabilizer suspension system (if equipped).
Sports mode
For winding mountain road driv-
ing or high speed driving.
Normal mode
For normal driving.
199
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the rear wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■Hill-start assist control
Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an
incline or slippery slope. It operates for approximately 5 seconds at maxi-
mum.
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
■Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped)
Reduces sway when cornering according to steering wheel movement
and the selected suspension damping mode, in order to maintain a stable
vehicle posture.
■PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 206
200
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
When the Enhanced VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are
operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping, rolling backwards when
starting on an incline, or if the rear
wheels (2WD models) or all
wheels (4WD models) spin, the
slip indicator light flashes to indi-
cate that the Enhanced VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control sys-
tems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that Enhanced VSC is
operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
GS460: The slip indicator light
flashes as well when
ABS is operating.
■VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (GS460)
Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement.
■VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, Enhanced VSC, TRAC, hill-start
assist control, VGRS (GS460) and EPS systems.
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling the brakes, engine output, and the movement of the
front wheels.
201
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
To disable TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and Enhanced VSC
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off TRAC only
Quickly push and release the but-
ton to turn off TRAC.
The message “TRAC OFF”
appears on the multi-information
display.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
202
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Turning off both TRAC and Enhanced VSC
Push and hold the button for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off TRAC and
Enhanced VSC.
The slip off indicator light should
come on and the message “TRAC
OFF” appears on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
203
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and Enhanced VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and
Enhanced VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when the vehi-
cle speed increases.
■Automatic TRAC and Enhanced VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and Enhanced VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when the vehicle speed increases.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, Enhanced VSC, TRAC,
hill-start assist control and VGRS (GS460) systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■Hill-start assist control operating conditions
This system comes into operation under the following conditions after the brake
pedal has been depressed and the vehicle has come to a stop:
●The shift lever is in the “D” or “S”.
●The system has detected that the vehicle is moving backwards.
●GS350: The brake pedal is not depressed.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when
there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel
may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The system should return to normal about
10 minutes.
■GS460: VGRS is disabled in the following situations
●During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while
driving at lower speeds.
●After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).
CAUTION
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or
serious injury:
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
205
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not
operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■When the Enhanced VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indica-
tor light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■When TRAC and Enhanced VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC
and Enhanced VSC unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pres-
sure level.
The ABS and Enhanced VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driv-
ing assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
: If equipped
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision. Pre-colli-
sion systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged
to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage.
■Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 65)
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
TRAC/VSC systems are disabled.
■Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■Pre-collision braking
When there is a possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the driver
using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines
that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to
reduce the collision speed. Pre-collision braking can be disabled using the
pre-collision braking off switch.
■AVS (if equipped)
If the system determines that the collision is unavoidable, the operation of
AVS ( P. 198) helps prevent the vehicle front from going down when
hard brakes are applied.
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Disabling pre-collision braking
Pre-collision braking enabled
Pre-collision braking disabled
The “PCS” warning light flashes
when pre-collision braking is dis-
abled.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obsta-
cles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obsta-
cles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occa-
sions when the radar sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■The pre-collision system is operational when
●Pre-collision seat belts (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision brake assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
●Pre-collision braking
• The pre-collision braking off button is not pressed.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 9 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 9 mph (15 km/h).
●AVS (if equipped)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
209
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
●When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When there is an abnormality in the radar sensor
●When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic struc-
ture to appear directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When passing through certain ETC (Electronic Toll Collection system) gates
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possi-
bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 535, 546)
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est suscepti-
ble de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of “LOOK-JUDGE-ACT”.
There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep
in mind the following important points.
●Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibil-
ity conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the likelihood of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situ-
ation.
●Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a col-
lision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
213
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all
items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
214
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (P. 217)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle
is not designed for trailer towing.
215
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 815 lb. (370 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
815 lb. — 366 lb. = 449 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as fol-
lows:
449 lb. — 388 lb. = 61 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occu-
pants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (com-
bined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
216
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk.
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
•Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray
•Instrument panel
•Dashboard
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■Weight of the load
●Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control result-
ing in an accident which may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause dete-
rioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
217
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 473 )
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: 815 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do
not exceed the total load capacity.
■Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
218
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is fro-
zen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
●Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
219
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Regulations on the use of tire chains
●Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
●Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial
cable chains or V-bar type chains.
• Install the chains on the rear tires.
• Refer to the explanation that comes with the tire chains for installa-
tion instructions.
●Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvert-
ent sliding or creeping.
220
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Shifting the windshield wiper position
You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or
icy condition etc.)
Grip the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position.
To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the wiper arm.
221
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
●Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●Maintain the specified level of tire inflation pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
222
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
223
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
224
2-5. Driving information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
225
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
226
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 5:03 pm
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen ........................... 228
Setting the touch screen ..... 235
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................... 246
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers....... 255
Windshield wiper
de-icer.................................... 256
Interior features 3
Interior features 3
227
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 5:03 pm
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type.................. 257
Using the radio........................ 260
Using the CD/DVD
player ...................................... 269
Playing an audio CD ............. 272
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs............................. 276
Playing DVD video/audio
(with DVD player) .............. 280
Playing a video CD
(with DVD player) ............... 294
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information ....... 297
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio....................................... 308
Listening to a USB
memory/iPod......................... 316
Optimal use of the
audio/video system............. 326
Using the AUX port ............. 328
Using the steering
switches.................................. 329
3-4. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)............. 332
Using a Bluetooth®
phone...................................... 338
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)............. 353
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .................... 382
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features......... 385
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 393
Vanity mirrors ......................... 394
Clock......................................... 395
Outside temperature
display..................................... 396
Ashtrays.................................... 397
Cigarette lighter.................... 398
Power outlet............................ 399
Seat heaters/ventilators...... 400
Armrest .................................... 402
Rear sunshade ........................ 403
Floor mats ................................ 406
Trunk features......................... 408
Garage door opener .............. 411
Compass ................................... 418
Safety Connect ...................... 422
228
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system
and air conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc.
Press or to display the following screen.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
The illustrations below are for vehicles with navigation system.
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the sys-
tem.
■Display
“Setup” screen
229
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
“Information” screen
■Reference
Display buttons
Button Page
“CLIMATE” P. 246
“A U D I O ” P. 257
“MAP VOICE”/”DEST” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“INFO PHONE” (Displaying the
“Information” screen) P. 228
“DISP” (Adjusting the display) P. 232
“SETUP”
(Displaying the “Setup” screen) P. 235
230
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
“Setup” screen
“Information” screen
Switch Page
“General” P. 235
“Clock” P. 2 3 9 /
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Voice” P. 24 0 /
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Navi.” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Phone” P. 332
“A u d i o ” P. 257
“Vehicle” P. 245 /
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Other” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
Switch Page
“Phone” P. 332
“Fuel Consumption” P. 23 4
“Map Data”, “Calendar”, “LEXUS
Insider”, “XM Sports”, “XM Stocks”,
“XM NavWeather”
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
231
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Initial screen
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode, the ini-
tial screen will be displayed for a
few seconds as the system starts
up.
Subscribers will be shown the
“LEXUS ENFORM” screen
next.
232
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Adjusting the display
Press .
Adjust the display as desired using “-” / “+” /“R” / “G”.
If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to
the previous screen.
*: Vehicles with DVD player only, displays during DVD video/audio or video
CD playback
STEP 1
STEP 2
“R” “G”
“Color”*Red Green
“-” “+”
“Tone”*Lighter Darker
“Contrast” Lower Higher
“Brightness” Darker Brighter
233
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■To avoid damaging the touch screen
●Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your fin-
ger from the screen and try again.
●Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.
■When using the touch screen
●If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
●The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen or
remove your sunglasses.
■Changing between day mode and night mode
■To turn off the display
If “Screen Off” is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice
only.
When the headlights are turned on, the
screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day
mode by touching “Day Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the
headlights are turned on until “Day Mode”
is touched again.
The switch will not be displayed if the
instrument panel light control is set to the
brightest level.
234
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fuel consumption
■Consumption
Press .
Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Consumption” screen does not appear, touch “Consumption”.
Fuel consumption in the past 30
minutes
Cruising range
■Past record (with navigation system)
Press .
Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, touch “Past Record”.
Average fuel consumption
(today)
Average fuel consumption
(past 5 days)
Best past fuel consumption
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Resetting the data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Consumption” screen will reset the consumption data.
Selecting “Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past record data.
235
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Setting the touch screen
General settings
This screen is used for language selection, and for setting operation
sounds, automatic screen change to on or off, etc.
Touch “General” on the “Setup” screen.
Page 1
Select language
Beep on/off
Automatic transition on/off
(with navigation system)
Select keyboard layout
Select the unit
Save settings
Make sure to save after changing
settings.
Delete personal data
Page 2
You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.
236
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Select language
Select the desired language.
■Change voice recognition language
The desired voice recognition language can be selected from the list.
■Automatic transition on/off
After 20 seconds of air conditioning or audio system use, the system
will return the display to the previous screen.
237
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Select keyboard layout
The keyboard layout can be changed.
“ABC” type
“QWERTY” type
■Select the unit
The measurement unit shown on the display can be changed.
238
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Delete personal data
Touch “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default settings:
• Radio preset stations
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Voice tag data
•Bluetooth
® phone data
•Volume setting
• Details setting
• Maintenance conditions*
• Maintenance information “off” setting*
• Address book*
•Areas to avoid*
•Previous points*
• Route guidance*
• Route trace*
*: If the navigation system is equipped
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
239
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Clock settings
Touch “Clock” on the “Setup” screen.
Select time zone
(with navigation system)
Daylight saving time on/off
Auto adjust clock on/off
(with navigation system)
Manual clock setting
■Manual adjustment
The minutes and hours can be adjusted manually when auto adjust clock is set to off.
240
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Voice settings
Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Page 1
Select voice guidance volume
Voice guidance on/off during
route guidance
(with navigation system)
Voice guidance on/off during
audio system etc. is in use
(with navigation system)
Voice recognition talkback on/
off
Restore default settings
Automatic recognition on/off
without pressing the talk switch
more than once
Voice guidance on/off when
using the traffic information
(with navigation system)
Voice guidance on/off when
using the XM® NavWeather
(with navigation system)
Select voice guidance projec-
tion
Page 2
241
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Audio settings
Touch “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Sound settings
Select portable player
Setting up Bluetooth® audio
■Sound settings
Touch “Sound Settings”.
Sound/DSP settings can be changed. (P. 3 26)
■Select portable player
Touch “Select Portable Player”.
A portable player can be selected
for connection.
Where no player is registered,
“Empty” is displayed.
When “Portable Player Info” is touched, the following screen is displayed:
STEP 1
STEP 2
242
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
“Device Name” and “Connection
Method” can be changed.
●Changing the device name
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired name.
●Changing the connection method
Touch “From Vehicle” or “From
Portable Player”.
“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio
system to the audio player.
“From Portable Player”: Connect
the audio player to the audio sys-
tem.
STEP 1
STEP 2
243
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting up Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Bluetooth* Audio Settings”.
Register/remove Bluetooth®
audio
Automatic connection on/off
Display passcode
Display device name
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
●Registering Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Register”.
Enter the passcode into the porta-
ble player.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
●Removing Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Remove”.
Touch the player to remove.
A confirmation screen will be dis-
played, touch “Yes” to remove the
player.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
244
3-1. Using the touch screen
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Changing the passcode
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired passcode.
The passcode can be between 4 and 8 characters in length, and is set
to “0000” by default.
●Changing the device name
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired name.
●Restoring the default settings
Touch “Default”.
A confirmation screen will be displayed, touch “Yes” to restore
the default settings.
■When setting the connection method to “From Portable Player”
●Connection methods differ depending on the audio player. Consult your audio
player’s manual.
●Automatic connection cannot be set to “On”.
■When using Bluetooth® audio
A confirmation screen will be displayed if an attempt is made to remove a portable
player.
Touch “Yes” to disconnect and remove the player.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
245
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vehicle settings
Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Refer to “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
Setting up intuitive parking
assist
●Setting up intuitive parking assist
Alert volume setting
Display setting
“Static”: Displays when the sen-
sors detect an obsta-
cle.
“Dynamic”: Displays if maneuvers
are required to avoid
an obstacle.
“Off”: Does not display the
intuitive parking assist
display.
■Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system is in use, the
warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting
has been set to “Off”.
246
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting.
Press to display the air conditioning operation screen.
The illustrations below are for vehicles with navigation system.
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the sys-
tem.
Automatic mode
Driver’s side
temperature display
Fan speed display
Off
Airflow display
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Passenger’s side
temperature
display
Micro dust and pollen filter
Driver’s side
temperature control
Air conditioning
ON/OFF switch
Outside air or recirculated mode
Windshield defogger
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Dual operation switch
247
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the voice command system (with navigation system)
Press the talk switch to operate the
voice command system.
(“Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Press to switch to automatic mode.
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated
air modes.
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-
perature on .
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set sepa-
rately.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
248
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tempera-
ture on .
Press (increase) or (decrease) on to separately adjust the tem-
perature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Touch “DUAL” to
return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting
(simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
modes each time “DUAL” is touched.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of “LO” to “HI” (decrease increase) on the oper-
ating screen.
Press to turn the fan off.
249
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Changing the air outlets
Touch any mode on the operating
screen.
Upper body
*: Only in the automatic mode
Upper body and feet
Feet
Feet and the windshield defogger operates
250
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning sys-
tem operates automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
251
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press .
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pol-
len is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically approximately 3
minutes later.
To stop the operation, press
again.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
Press until the smog sensor screen appears while the
vehicle is stopped.
Touch any switch of “LO” to “HI”
(lower sensitivity higher sensi-
tivity) on the operating screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
252
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
Rear seat outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
253
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm
or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode in situ-
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
■Outside temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when “A /C ” is touched.
■Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-
matically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is off, and the fan is operating, turning the auto mode on
will activate the air conditioning system.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
●In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to .
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
254
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the indicator light on “A/C” flashes
Touch “A/C” and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more.
There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light contin-
ues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when
the engine is off.
255
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■Operating conditions
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in the IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Turn the defoggers off when the engine is off.
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
256
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Windshield wiper de-icer
■Operating conditions
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in the IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
: If equipped
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Press .
ON/OFF
Touch the switch to turn on the
windshield wiper de-icer. The
windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Touching the switch again also
turns the de-icer off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
257
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type
CD and (optional) DVD player with changer and AM/FM radio.
Press and touch each tabs to display the audio operation screen.
The illustrations below are for vehicles with navigation system.
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the sys-
tem.
258
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the voice command system (with navigation system)
Press the talk switch to operate the
voice command system.
(“Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
Title Page
Using the radio P. 260
Using the CD/DVD player P. 269
Playing an audio CD P. 272
Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 276
Playing DVD video/audio P. 280
Playing video CD P. 294
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information P. 297
Listening to Bluetooth® audio P. 3 08
Listening to a USB memory/iPod P. 31 6
Optimal use of the audio/video system P. 326
Using the AUX port P. 328
Using the steering switches P. 32 9
259
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■To avoid damaging the audio/video system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
260
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the radio
Audio control screen display button
Power Volume
Seek frequency
Preset tuning
Adjust the
frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
AMFM/SAT mode buttons
Preset stations
Setting the sound
(P. 3 26)
Scan for
receivable stations
Tr a f f i c
information
261
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing
or on .
Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a
beep.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Touch “SCAN” on the screen until “PSCAN” appears.
Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch “SCAN” once again.
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be
played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch “SCAN” once again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
262
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■Receiving RDS broadcasts
Touch “ Type” or “Type ” on the
screen.
The program type changes as follows each time the switch is touched.
●“ROCK”
●“MISC” (Miscellaneous)
●“INFORM” (Information)
●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
●“RELIGION”
●“ALERT” (Emergency messages)
When a program is set, “Type Seek” appears.
STEP 1
263
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Touch “Type Seek” on the screen.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no radio station of that type is found, “Nothing” appears on the screen.
■Displaying radio text messages
If “Message” appears on the screen, a text message may be displayed.
■Traffic announcement
Touch “Traffic” on the screen.
“Traf. Seek” appears on the display,
and the radio will start seeking any
station broadcasting traffic pro-
gram information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “Nothing” appears on the
display.
STEP 2
264
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press or touch “SAT” tab on
the screen.
The display changes as follows
each time the switch is pressed.
SAT1 SAT2 SAT3
Turn to select a desired channel from all the categories or
press or on to select a desired channel in the current
category.
■Presetting XM® Satellite Radio channels
Select the desired channel. Touch one of the preset stations (1 - 6) and
hold it until you hear a beep.
■Changing the channel category
Touch “ Type” or “Type ” on the screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
265
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
When the desired channel is reached, touch “SCAN” once
again.
●Scanning preset channels
Touch “SCAN” on the screen and hold it until you hear a
beep.
“PSCAN” appears on the screen.
When the desired channel is reached, touch “SCAN” once
again.
■Displaying the title and artist name
Touch “Text” on the screen.
The screen will display up to 16
characters.
Touch the switch once again to
return to the previous screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
266
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-
vide under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.-
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada-
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using the dial, and the receiver’s 8-character ID
number will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompany-
ing Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
*: Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change with-
out notice.
267
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surround-
ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
UNAUTH
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription infor-
mation. When a contract is canceled, you can choose
“CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to lis-
ten to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite
Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-
ger signal.
LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
268
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
CH UNAVL
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-
ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-
matically, select another channel.
270
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Loading a disc
■Loading a single disc
Press .
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the CD/DVD player door opens.
■Loading multiple discs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the CD/DVD player door opens.
After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flash-
ing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the CD/DVD
player door has opened.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.
To cancel the operation, press the or / button.
Ejecting a disc
■Ejecting a disc
To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the
screen or press or on .
Press and remove the disc.
■Ejecting all discs
Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the discs.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
271
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting a disc
■To select a disc to play
Touch “Change Discs” on the screen.
Touch the desired disc on the
screen or press or on .
STEP 1
STEP 2
■When loading a disc
If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
■Vehicles with DVD player
This screen appears when the video screen is
first displayed after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
273
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Loading and ejecting discs
P. 270
Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks
■Selecting a track
Press to move up and to move down using until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .
■Selecting a track from the track list
Touch “Select” on the screen.
Touch the desired track number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Scanning a disc
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired track is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
274
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Searching a disc
■Selecting a disc to play
P. 271
■Scanning loaded discs
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “D.SCAN” appears.
The first 10 seconds of the first track on each disc will be played.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired disc is reached.
Random playback
■Current disc
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
Songs are played in random order.
■All discs
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “D.RAND” appears.
Tracks on all loaded discs are played in random order.
Repeating a track or a disc
■Repeating a track
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating a disc
Touch “RPT” on the screen and hold until “D.RPT” appears.
STEP 1
STEP 2
275
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch “RAND”, “RPT” or “SCAN” on the screen once again.
■Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the titles of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
32 letters can be displayed.
■Error messages
P. 297
276
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Power Volume
Disc eject
Playback
Select folder
Search playback
Disc slot
Random playback
Repeat play
Select file Disc load
Select disc
Audio control screen display button
Select file
Displays folder list
Setting the
sound
(P. 3 26)
Displays file list
Disc selection
277
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 270
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 271
Selecting a folder
■Selecting a folder
Touch “Folder ” or “ ” on the screen to select the next/previous
folder.
■Selecting a folder from the folder list
Touch “Select” for Folder on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “FLD.SCAN” appears.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired folder is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
278
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting one file at a time
Turn or press or on to select the desired file.
■Selecting a file from the file list
Touch “Select” for File on the screen.
Touch the desired file number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired file is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
279
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Random playback
■Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
■Playing all the files on a disc in random order
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “FLD.RAND” appears.
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating all of the files in a folder
Touch and hold “RPT” on the screen until “FLD.RPT” appears.
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch “RAND”, “RPT” or “SCAN” on the screen once again.
■Error messages
P. 297
280
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Playing DVD video/audio (with DVD player)
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
When a DVD video disc or DVD audio disc is inserted while driving, the
audio contents of the main feature will automatically be played. However,
some discs may not be played from the main story.
If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation rel-
evant to that control is not permitted.
Disc selection
Disc slot
Disc eject
Playback
Disc load
Audio/video control screen display button
Power Volume
Select disc
Track and chapter selection/
fast forward/rewind
DVD operation
Setting the
sound
(P. 3 26)
Return to menu screen
281
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Control icon screen
DVD video mode
Menu screen appears
Setting screen appears
(P. 282)
Selecting a disc (P. 271)
Display menu control key
(P. 283)
Vehicle is completely
stopped and the parking
brake is applied, the video
screen returns
Rewind
Stop
Pause
Touch to play.
Fast forward
Setting the sound (P. 326)
DVD audio mode
282
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 270
■DVD settings
Touch “Settings” on “DVD” screen, the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Search by title/group number
Change audio language/
audio format
Change angle
Change initial setting
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there
Change subtitle language
Change screen size
Video screen returns
Return to previous page
Select menu number
Go to next page
DVD audio mode
283
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc
Touch and hold or on the control icon screen or press and hold
or on until a beep is heard.
Slow playback
Touch and then touch on the control icon screen. Video is played
slowly while you are touching .
Using the DVD menu
Touch “Menu” or “Top Menu” on the control icon screen.
Touch if the menu control key does not appear on the menu
screen.
Enter the menu item using to
, and touch “Enter”.
When you touch the any point on
the screen, the controls will disap-
pear.
To display them again, touch the
any point on the screen.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
284
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Searching for a desired screen
■Searching by title (DVD video mode only)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired title number and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the group number and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired bonus group number and touch “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching by chapter/track
Press or on to select a chapter/track.
■Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
Touch “Select Number” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired track number and touch “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
285
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Changing the subtitle language
Touch “Subtitle” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
“Hide”: Hides the subtitles
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
Touch “Audio” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
286
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
Touch “Audio” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available audio format is
selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing the angle (if the angle option is available)
Touch “Angle” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available angle is selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
287
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Changing screen size
Touch “Wide” on the “Settings” screen.
Touch the desired display. After
setting, touch “Save”.
Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black
Widens the 3 : 4 screen hori-
zontally to fill the screen
Widens the 3 : 4 screen verti-
cally and horizontally, in the
same ratio, to fill the screen
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing the page (DVD audio only)
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” on the “Settings” screen to change the
page.
STEP 1
STEP 2
288
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Initial DVD setup
The initial settings can be changed.
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
Touch “DVD Video Settings” or “DVD Audio Settings” on the
“Settings” screen.
Touch the setting to be changed.
Page 1
After you change the settings,
touch “Save”.
“Default”:Restores default settings
: Returns to the previous
screen
Page 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
289
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting audio language (DVD video only)
Touch “Audio Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 29 1 )
■Setting subtitle language
Touch “Subtitle Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 29 1 )
■Setting menu language
Touch “DVD Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 29 1 )
■Setting angle mark
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Touch “Angle Mark”.
Select “On” or “Off”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
290
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Parental lock (DVD video only)
Touch “Parental Lock”.
Input the 4-digit personal code and then touch “OK”.
If you enter wrong numbers, touch to delete the numbers.
Select a parental level (1 - 8). (P. 300)
■Setting the auto start
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically
start playing.
Touch “Auto Start”.
Select “On” or “Off”.
Certain discs may not play if you set to “On”.
■Setting sound dynamic range (DVD video only)
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can
be adjusted.
Touch “Sound Dynamic Range”.
Select the desired level.
■Entering a language code
If you touch “Other” on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select
Subtitle Language” screen or “Select DVD Language” screen, you can
select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that lan-
guage is available.
Input the 4-digit language code and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input digit
: Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
291
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Language codes
Code Language Code Language Code Language
0514 English 0207 Bulgarian 0712 Galician
0618 French 0208 Bihari 0714 Guarani
0405 German 0209 Bislama 0721 Gujarati
0920 Italian 0214 Bengali 0801 Hausa
0519 Spanish 0215 Tibetan 0809 Hindi
2608 Chinese 0218 Breton 0818 Croatian
1412 Dutch 0301 Catalan 0821 Hungarian
1620 Portuguese 0315 Corsican 0825 Armenian
1922 Swedish 0319 Czech 0901 Interlingua
1821 Russian 0325 Welsh 0905 Interlingue
1115 Korean 0401 Danish 0911 Inupiak
0512 Greek 0426 Bhutani 0914 Indonesian
0101 Afar 0515 Esperanto 0919 Icelandic
0102 Abkhazian 0520 Estonian 0923 Hebrew
0106 Afrikaans 0521 Basque 1001 Japanese
0113 Amharic 0601 Persian 1009 Yiddish
0118 Arabic 0609 Finnish 1023 Javanese
0119 Assamese 0610 Fiji 1101 Georgian
0125 Aymara 0615 Faroese 1111 Kazakh
0126 Azerbaijani 0625 Frisian 1112 Greenlandic
0201 Bashkir 0701 Irish 1113 Cambodian
0205 Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic 1114 Kannada
292
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Code Language Code Language Code Language
1119 Kashmiri 1415 Norwegian 1914 Shona
1121 Kurdish 1503 Occitan 1915 Somali
1125 Kirghiz 1513 (Afan)
Oromo 1917 Albanian
1201 Latin 1518 Oriya 1918 Serbian
1214 Lingala 1601 Panjabi 1919 Siswati
1215 Laothian 1612 Polish 1920 Sesotho
1220 Lithuanian 1619 Pashto,
Pushto 1921 Sundanese
1222 Latvian 1721 Quechua 1923 Swahili
1307 Malagasy 1813 Rhaeto-
Romance 2001 Ta m i l
1309 Maori 1814 Kirundi 2005 Te l u g u
1311 Macedonian 1815 Romanian 2007 Tajik
1312 Malayalam 1823 Kinyarwanda 2008 Thai
1314 Mongolian 1901 Sanskrit 2009 Tig r inya
1315 Moldavian 1904 Sindhi 2011 Tu r k m e n
1318 Marathi 1907 Sangho 2012 Ta g a l o g
1319 Malay 1908 Serbo-
Croatian 2014 Setswana
1320 Maltese 1909 Sinhalese 2015 To n g a
1325 Burmese 1911 Slovak 2018 Tu r k i s h
1401 Nauru 1912 Slovenian 2019 Ts o n g a
1405 Nepali 1913 Samoan 2020 Ta t a r
293
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Code Language Code Language Code Language
2023 Tw i 2209 Vietnamese 2515 Yo r u b a
2111 Ukrainian 2215 Vola p ü k 2621 Zulu
2118 Urdu 2315 Wolof
2126 Uzbek 2408 Xhosa
■Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check that the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player’s region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 297
294
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Playing a video CD (with DVD player)
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
Setting the
sound
(P. 3 26)
Disc slot
Disc eject
Disc load
Video control screen display button
Power Volume
Select disc
Track selection/
fast forward/rewind Playback
Disc selection
Video CD
operation
295
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 270
Fast forwarding/rewinding a video CD
Touch and hold or on the control icon screen or press and hold
or on until a beep is heard.
Slow playback
Touch and then touch on the control icon screen. Video is played
slowly while you are touching .
■Settings screen
Touch “Settings” on the “Video CD” screen, the following screen
appears.
Change sound multiplex
Return to previous page
Search by track number
(P. 284)
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there.
Change screen size
Go to next page
If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation rel-
evant to that control is not permitted.
296
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the video CD menu
Touch “Return” on the “Settings” screen.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu items.
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Touch “Main/Sub” on the “Settings” screen. The mode cycles through
each time the switch is touched.
“Main/Sub” “Main” “Sub”
Changing the page
Disc menu displaying
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” to change the previous/next page.
While playing the video
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” to change the previous/next track.
Selecting a desired screen
P. 284
■Error messages
P. 297
297
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information
■Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the
problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message Cause Correction
Procedures
No CD
or
No disc
There is no disc in the CD
or DVD changer Insert a disc
Check CD X
or
Check disc X
• The disc X is dirty or
damaged
• The disc X is inserted
upside down
• The disc X is not play-
able with the player
• Clean the disc
• Insert the disc correctly
• Confirm the disc is play-
able with the player
CD Error
or
DVD Error
• There is a malfunction
within the system
• Operation is stopped
due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player
• Eject the disc
• Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down
NO MUSIC FILE
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc
Eject the disc
298
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■DVD video discs
●The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.
●Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this
DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc
on this player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if
the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be
able to use it.
●The DVD player supports multi-channel sound output.
■Symbols shown on DVD video discs
Mark Meaning
Indicates NTSC format.
Indicates the number of audio tracks.
Indicates the number of language subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
Indicates the screen display ratios available.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code.
ALL: In all countries
Number: Region code
299
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
Without DVD player
With DVD player
Discs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■CD/DVD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player.
300
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■DVD video disc information
●DVD video discs
Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted
“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The
picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate
encoding technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is
changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is
stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Fur-
thermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the
more advanced technology of DVD video.
●Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions
of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
●Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
●Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
●Region codes
The region codes are found on DVD players and DVD discs. If a DVD video
disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play
the disc on that DVD player. (P. 298 )
301
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.
●Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
■Sound
●Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories.
●Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights
owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copy-
right protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
●DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
System, Inc.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued
& pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Sur-
round and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
302
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
303
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 level 1, level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
304
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-
ing on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be pos-
sible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
305
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■CD-R and CD-RW discs
●CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
●It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or
dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.
●It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depend-
ing on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct
format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the
applications.)
●CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play dam-
aged discs.
●If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
●Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.
CAUTION
■DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversa-
tions represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be star-
tled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
306
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the player and render the disc insert/eject function unus-
able.
●Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
●Low-quality and deformed discs.
●Discs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
●Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have the
label peeled off.
307
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
●Do not apply oil to the player.
●Store discs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
●Do not insert more than one disc at a time.
308
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a por-
table player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Album selection
Random play
Repeat play
Audio control screen display button
Track selection/fast forward/rewind
VolumePower
Connection status
Play/pause
Setting the
sound
(P. 3 26)
309
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
310
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to enter your portable
player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the
vehicle’s audio system. (P. 243)
For the operation procedure for the portable player, consult your player’s
accompanying instruction manual.
■When the connection method is set to “From Vehicle”
When auto connection is on
When the portable player is on standby for the connection, it will be
automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
When auto connection is off
Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following
procedure.
Touch “Connect”.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
311
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When the connection method is set to “From Portable Player”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio
system.
Touch “Connect”.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
Playing Bluetooth® audio
Touch or to play/pause.
Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.
312
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting a track/album
■Selecting a track
Press to move up and to move down using until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .
■Selecting an album
Touch “Album ” or “ ” to select
the desired album.
Random playback
Touch “RAND” to play the tracks on the album in random order.
To cancel the random playback, touch again.
Repeating a track
Touch “RPT” to repeat a track.
To cancel the repeat playback, touch again.
313
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When using the Bluetooth® audio system
●In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• The portable player is turned off
• The portable player is not connected
• The portable player battery is low
●There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth®
audio play.
●Depending on the type of portable player that is connected to the system, oper-
ation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the portable player is behind the
seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects,
connection status may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable player, and this system
does not have a charging function.
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
314
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Compatible models
Portable players must correspond to the following specifications:
●Bluetooth® specification
Ver. 1.1 or hig her
(Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or higher)
●Profile
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable player.
Please go to the website at http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved portable play-
ers for this system.
■Certification
P. 336
■Reconnecting the portable player
If the portable player is disconnected with a poor reception when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system
automatically reconnects the portable player.
If you have switched off the portable player yourself, follow the instructions below to
reconnect:
●Select the portable player again
●Enter the portable player
■When transferring ownership of your vehicle
Be sure to remove the registered portable player from the system.
315
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not use the portable player or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the portable player.
316
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Listening to a USB memory/iPod
Connecting a USB memory or iPod enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
The above illustration shows an iPod screen.
Audio control screen display button
Track/file selection
VolumePower
Select play mode Displays track list
Setting the
sound
(P. 3 26)
Random play
Repeat play
Play/pause
Select file/track
317
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Connecting the USB memory/iPod
Open the cover and connect the
player.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory/iPod if it is not turned on.
Playing an iPod
■Play/pause
Touch or to play/pause.
■Selecting a play mode
Touch “Menu” on the “USB” screen.
Select the desired play mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
318
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting a folder (USB memory only)
■Selecting a folder
Touch “Folder ” or “ ” on the screen to select the next/previous
folder.
■Selecting a folder from the list
Touch “Select” for Folder on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
(USB memory only)
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “FLD.SCAN” appears.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired folder is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
319
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting a file/track
■Selecting one file/track at a time
Turn or press or on to select the desired file/track.
■Selecting a file/track from the list
Touch “Select” for File/Track.
Touch the desired file/track num-
ber.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (USB mem-
ory only)
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired file is reached.
Random playback
■Playing files/tracks from a particular folder in random order
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
■Playing the all files/tracks in random order
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “FLD.RAND” appears.
STEP 1
STEP 2
320
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Repeat play
■Repeating a file/track
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating a all of the files in a folder (USB memory only)
Touch and hold “RPT” on the screen until “FLD.RPT” appears.
■Canceling random and repeat playback
Touch “RAND” or “RPT” on the screen once again.
■About iPod
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
●iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve some malfunctions.
■USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve some malfunctions.
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your
iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
321
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Error messages for iPod
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that an empty playlist is selected.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade
your iPod software to the latest version.
■Error messages for USB memory
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
■Compatible models
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models
listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
Model Generation Software version
iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or highe r
iPod nano
1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or highe r
2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or hig her
iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
322
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
323
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
324
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder.
If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it
was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA
files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speak-
ers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
325
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not connect an iPod or USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the player or its terminal
●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The temperature inside of the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the player while it is con-
nected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
326
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Optimal use of the audio/video system
Touch “Sound” to adjust the
sound settings.
“Sound” tab
Touch “-” or “+” to
adjust the treble, mid or
bass to a level between
-5 to 5.
Touch “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear
audio balance to a level
between F7 and R7.
Touch “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio bal-
ance to a level between
L7 and R7.
327
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed, wind noise or other noise.
“DSP” tab
Surround on/off
Automatic Sound Levelizer
(ASL) on/off
328
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjust-
ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
using the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
Press or touch “AUX” tab on the screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
329
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using the steering switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the steering switches.
Power on, select audio
source
Volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a
track, file
(MP3 and
WMA) and
disc
DVD mode*: Selects a
track, chapter
and disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track
and album
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file
and folder
*: DVD player only
330
3-3. Using the audio system
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second
or more.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is on. The audio source changes as fol-
lows each time the switch is pressed. If a mode cannot be used, it will be
skipped.
FM (1, 2) SAT (1, 2, 3) CD/DVD player Bluetooth® audio
AUX iPod/USB memory AM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press or on to select a radio station.
To seek stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or chapter
Press to select CD/DVD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB
memory mode.
Press or on to select the desired track/file or
chapter.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
331
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Selecting a disc in the CD or DVD player
Press to select the CD or DVD mode.
Press and hold or on until you hear a beep.
Selecting an album
Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold or on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
Press to select CD (only when MP3/WMA disc is in use) or
USB memory mode.
Press and hold or on until you hear a beep.
■Canceling automatic seek station
Push the same switch.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
332
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows a mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-
free system and outgoing/incoming calls.
The display will differ depending on the type of the system.
■Telephone switch
Sending/Receiving/
“Phone” screen display
End call
■Microphone
You can use the microphone
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the driver’s
side speaker.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 33 9)
333
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
Call area “Rm”: Roaming area
“Hm”: Home area
Signal strength Excellent Poor
334
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
●Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If the air conditioning is set to high
• There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the mobile phone is switched off
●If you are outside service range
●If the mobile phone is not connected
●If the mobile phone’s battery is low
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may dete-
riorate.
■Battery charge/Signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
335
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
●The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
●Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.
■About the phonebook in this system
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
●Phonebook data
●Voi c e tag
●All of call history
●Speed dial
When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 23 8 )
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
336
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Compatible models
This system supports the following service.
●Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or
higher)
●Profiles
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or
higher)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone, and take OPP or PBAP service individually.
Please go to “http://www.lexus.com/” to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this
system.
■Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK021
IC: 775E-K021
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
337
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation expo-
sure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the
IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in.
(20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■Caution while driving
Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.
338
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using a Bluetooth® phone
Device name
Bluetooth® connection status
Help icon
Character deletion
Make a call
To display the screen shown above, press , and touch “Phone” on
the “Information” screen.
339
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
You can register up to 4 phones in the system.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338 )
Touch “Yes”.
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is
displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
340
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Bluetooth® phone connection
There are two connection methods available — automatic and manual.
Automatic
When you register your phone,
auto connection will be activated.
Always set it to this mode and
leave the Bluetooth® phone on the
place where connection can be
established.
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system will search for a
nearby cellular phone you have
registered. Next, the system auto-
matically connects with the most
recent of the phones connected to
in the past. Then, the connection
result is displayed.
341
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Handsfree Power” is turned off,
you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338 )
Touch “Connect Phone”.
Touch “Handsfree Power”, or
touch the phone to connect.
The “Connect Bluetooth*” screen
is displayed.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trade-
mark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
342
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automat-
ically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, it
must be connected manually, or the phone must be re-selected or re-entered.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
●Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
●It may take time to connect.
■Help icon
When “?” is displayed on the screen, an explanation of the function can be dis-
played.
To display the explanation of the function, touch “?” and choose the desired func-
tion.
343
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■Dialing
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338 )
Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone num-
ber, touch .
To dial the last inputted phone
number, touch “Redial”.
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
344
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Dialing from the phonebook
With navigation system
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 360)
Without navigation system
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in total for the phonebooks. (P. 360)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 3 3 8)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data to call
from the list.
If the phonebook is empty, a mes-
sage will be displayed.
If you want to transfer new contacts
from a cellular phone, touch “Yes”.
Choose the number and then
touch or press on the
steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
345
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
(P. 360)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338 )
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired number to make a call.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
346
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: all the numbers below which were memorized
“Missed”: calls which you missed
“Incoming”: calls which you received
“Outgoing”: numbers which you called
You can call using the 5 most recently called numbers shown by “All”
while driving.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 3 3 8)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired data from the list.
Touch or press on the
steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
347
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Calling using voice recognition
Using voice recognition, you can call by name, call by number, and
select a phone.
Ta l k s w i t c h
The “Calling by Name” operating procedure is explained here. Other
operating procedures are also similar.
348
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Calling by name
You can call by giving a voice tag registered in the phonebook. (P. 374)
When you select “English” in “Language”, you can call by giving a name
registered in the phonebook.
Press the talk switch.
If you want to check the entire
command list, say “Command list”
to display the “Command List”
screen.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Phone”.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Dial by Name”.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say the
desired name.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say the
type of number such as “Mobile” or “Home”.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Dial”. (You can also call by pushing on the steering wheel or
selecting “Dial”.)
■Calling using POI (With navigation system)
You can make a call using a Point Of Interest.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
349
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Call history list
●If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone
book, the name is displayed in the call history.
●If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the call history.
●Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored
in the call history.
■When driving
The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(except for call using the 5 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab) are
unavailable.
■International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in
use.
■Calling by using the call history
Push on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.
Push on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
Push on the steering wheel to select the most recent number in the
history.
Select or push on the steering wheel.
■To cancel voice recognition
●Press and hold the talk switch.
●Press on the steering wheel.
●Touch “Cancel”. (excluding command verification)
●Say “Cancel”.
■When using voice recognition
Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize the desired command.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
350
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Touch or press on the
steering wheel.
■To refuse a call
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
■International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the
mobile phone in use.
351
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
■To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Touch “Mute”.
■Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
To u c h “ 0-9 ”.
Input the number.
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phonebook, “Send”
and “Exit” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are
symbols or numbers displayed
as p or w, that come after the
phone number.
(e.g. 056133w0123p#1✽)
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and touch “Send”.
If you touch “Exit”, this function will end.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
352
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■To transfer a call
Touch “Call Transfer”.
■To hang up
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
■Interrupt call
When the call is interrupted by the third party while talking, the incom-
ing call message will be displayed.
●To talk with the other party: Touch or press on the steering
wheel.
●To refuse the call: Touch or press on the steering wheel.
Everytime you touch or press on the steering wheel after a
call is interrupted, you will be switched to the other party.
If your cellular phone is not accepted in HFP Ver. 1.5, this function can-
not be used.
■Transferring calls
●It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to a mobile phone while driving.
●If you transfer from a mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be
displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
●Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.
●For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■While driving
Key input is unavailable.
■Voice recognition during a call
“Mute” and “Send Tones” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 3 47)
■Interrupt call operation
Interrupt call operation may differ from depending on your phone company and the
cellular phone.
353
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
Setting the volume
Managing the phone
Phonebook settings
Bluetooth® settings
Detailed settings
To display the screen shown above, press , and touch “Phone” on
the “Setup” screen.
354
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Setting the volume
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Volume” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Choose the volume setting switch.
“Voice Volume”: changes the
speaker volume
“Ring Volume”: changes the ring
volume
Touch “-” or “+” to lower or raise
the volume, and then “OK”.
When you complete all settings, touch “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Adaptive volume control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume one level.
If the vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original
level.
■To return to the default volume settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
STEP 5
355
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Managing the phone
■Registering a Bluetooth® phone
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “(add new)” to register your
cellular phone to the system.
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
356
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You may only use
one phone at a time.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Select the phone to be use.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the phone.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
■Editing a Bluetooth®phone
You can see the information of the Bluetooth® phone on the system or
edit.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “Edit Phones”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
357
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Select a phone to edit.
Touch “Edit”.
Input the device name, and touch
“OK”.
Confirm the device name, and touch “OK”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
358
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Removing a Bluetooth®phone
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “Remove Phones” on the “Phones” screen.
Select the desired phone. If you
want to remove all phones, touch
“Select All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
■Registering a Bluetooth® phone in a different way
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “New Phone” on the “Phones” screen.
Touch “(empty)” on the “Phone Position” screen.
Follow the steps for “Registering a Bluetooth® phone” from “STEP4”.
(P. 355)
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
359
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected while registering or selecting a
phone
When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be dis-
played. If you want to disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
■When Bluetooth® audio is connected while registering a phone
When you register your phone, Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect
automatically when you finish registration. It will not be reconnected depending on
the phone you are using.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when you finish
registration. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.
■Setting the “Handsfree Power”
The state changes between “On” and “Off” every time you select “Handsfree
Power” on the “Connect Phone” screen. When “Handsfree Power” is “On”, the
Bluetooth® phone is automatically connected when you turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■Editing the “Device Name”
If you change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not
changed.
■About “Device Address”
This address is specific to the system and cannot be changed. If you have registered
two Bluetooth® phones with the same device name and you cannot distinguish one
from the other, refer to this address.
■When you delete a Bluetooth® phone
The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.
■Connecting the phone by voice recognition
“Connect Phone” includes “Select Phone”, “Add New Phone” and “Handsfree
Power Off (On)” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 3 47)
360
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Phonebook settings
With navigation system
The phonebook manages a maximum of 4 phonebooks in total. Up to
1000 person’s data (up to 3 numbers a person) can be registered in each
phonebook.
Without navigation system
The phonebook manages a maximum of 4 phonebooks in total. Up to
1000 person’s data (up to 3 numbers a person) can be registered in total
for the phonebooks.
Setting the phonebook
Speed dials setting
Deleting the call history
Setting the voice tag
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
361
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting the phonebook
●Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add
Contacts”.
In the case that the phonebook
contains phonebook data, this
screen will be displayed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
362
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Transfer the phonebook data to
the system using the Bluetooth®
phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, touch “Cancel”.
If the transferring is interrupted
midway through the process, the
phonebook data transferred until
then can be memorized in the sys-
tem.
In the case that you have selected “Add Contacts”, a message will
be displayed.
If you want to transfer another phonebook, touch “Yes”.
●Registering the phonebook data
You can register the phonebook data. Up to 3 numbers per person
can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “New Contact” on the “Contacts” screen.
Input the name, and touch “OK”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
363
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Input the phone number, and
touch “OK”.
If you want to use the tone signal
after the phone number, input the
tone signal too.
Touch the desired phone type.
When two or less numbers in total are registered to this contact,
this screen is displayed. When you want to add a number to this
contact, select “Yes”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
364
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Editing the phonebook data
You can register the phone number separately.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Edit Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Choose “Edit” for the desired
name or number.
Edit the name or number. After editing, touch “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
365
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Deleting the phonebook data
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
366
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
■Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 3 38)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
■When transferring a phone number
Transfer the phone number while engine is running.
■When you have selected “Replace Contacts” to transfer the phone number
●If your cellular phone does not support PBAP or OPP service, you cannot use
this function.
●If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data
without operating your phone.
●If your phone does not support PBAP service, you must transfer the phonebook
data by operating your phone.
■When you have selected “Add Contacts” to transfer the phone number
If your cellular phone does not support OPP service, you can not use this function.
You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected during transferring a phonebook
When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be dis-
played.
If you want to disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
■Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer
finishes. (It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
367
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Editing the phonebook data in a different way (From “Contact Data” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Edit Contact” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from “STEP5”. (P. 3 64)
■Editing the phonebook data in a different way (From “Call History” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Add Contact” or “Update Contact”.
If you touch “Add Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data”
from “STEP5”. (P. 3 64)
If you touch “Update Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook
data” from “STEP4”. (P. 3 6 4 )
■Deleting the phonebook data in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Delete Contact” on the “Contact Data” screen.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
“Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
368
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Speed dials setting
●Registering the speed dial
You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18
numbers per phone can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “New Speed Dial”.
Choose the data to register.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
369
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Touch the desired phone number.
Touch the switch you want to regis-
ter the number in.
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation mes-
sage will be displayed. If you want to replace it, touch “Yes”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
370
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Editing the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “Edit Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Touch “Edit”.
Edit the name. After editing, touch “OK” and then “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
371
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Deleting the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
372
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting the speed dials in a different way (To display the “Speed Dials” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
Touch “Yes” to set new speed dial.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from “STEP6”. (P. 3 68)
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact Data” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from “STEP6”. (P. 3 68)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
373
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Deleting call history
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Choose the desired history to
delete.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Deleting call history in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
Follow the steps “Deleting call history” from “STEP4”. (P. 373)
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
374
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting the voice tag
●Registering the voice tag
You can register a voice tag. Up to 20 numbers can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “New Voice Tag”.
Choose the data to register.
Tou c h “ - REC”, and record a
voice tag.
To play the voice tag, touch
“ Play”.
When you complete the voice tag registration, touch “OK”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
375
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
●Editing the voice tag
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Edit Voice Tags” on the “Voice Tags” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Edit the voice tag. After editing, touch “OK”.
●Deleting the voice tag
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 360)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete Voice Tags” on the “Voice Tags” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
376
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Setting the voice tag in a different way (To display the “Voice Tags” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Contacts” screen.
■When using the voice tag
Do not change the language setting from the language setting used when register-
ing. If they are different, the voice recognition cannot recognize the voice tag that
you have registered.
■When recording a voice tag
Do so in a quiet environment.
■Registering the voice tag in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 338)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Set Voice Tag” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Follow the steps “Registering the voice tag” from “STEP5”. (P. 374)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
377
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Bluetooth settings
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.
Changing the handsfree power
Changing the name in the Bluetooth® network
Changing the password that you register your cellular phone in the
system
The address specific to the system
You cannot change it. If the same device name is displayed on the screen of
your phone, refer to it.
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
378
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Changing the handsfree power
The Bluetooth phone is automatically connected when you turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode. You can change this state to “On” or “Off”.
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 37 7 )
Touch “Handsfree Power” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Touch “On” or “Off”, and then
“Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Editing the device name
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 37 7 )
Touch “Edit” of “Device Name” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Input the device name, and touch “OK”.
Touch “Save” on the “Bluetooth* Information” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
379
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Editing the passcode
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 37 7 )
Touch “Edit” of “Passcode” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Input a passcode, and touch “OK”.
Touch “Save” on the “Bluetooth* Information” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■While driving
You cannot change the state of “Handsfree Power” from “On” to “Off” while driving.
■About “Device Name”
The device names are common Bluetooth audio and Bluetoothphone.
If you change the device name of the phone, the device name of the audio
will change at same time. However, passcodes can be set separately.
■To return to the default detailed phone settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
If the state of “Handsfree Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth con-
nection will begin.
STEP 4
380
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Detailed settings
Changing the incoming call display mode
Changing the display phone status
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 353)
Touch “Details” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
381
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Changing the incoming call display mode
You can select the method of the incoming call display.
Display the “Detailed Phone Settings” screen. (P. 380)
Touch “Incoming Call Display Mode” on the “Detailed Phone
Settings” screen.
Touch “Full Screen” or “Drop
Down”, and touch “Save”.
“Full Screen”:
The hands-free screen is dis-
played when a call is received,
and you can operate the system
from that screen.
“Drop Down”:
A message is displayed at the
top of the screen, and you can
only operate the system with the
steering switches.
■Changing the display phone status
You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when
connecting.
Display the “Detailed Phone Settings” screen. (P. 380)
Touch “Display Phone Status” on the “Detailed Phone Settings”
screen.
Touch “On” or “Off”, and then “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■To return to the default detailed phone settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
382
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Illuminated entry system: The various lights automatically turn on/off
according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, whether the doors are open/closed, and the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch mode.
When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot
lights, inside door handle lights and shift lever light will turn off. (P. 14 6 )
Outer foot light
Steering spot light
Front personal lights
(P. 384)
Shift lever light
Front interior lights(P. 383)
Inside door handle lights
Rear personal lights
(P. 384)
Rear interior lights
Door courtesy lights
Foot light
Front scuff light
383
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Interior lights
“ON”
“OFF”
“DOOR”
The interior lights are turned on/off
by the illuminated entry system.
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
If the interior lights, personal lights and steering spot light remain ON when the
door is not fully closed or the interior light switch in “DOOR” position, the lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 62 0 )
385
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Overhead console (if equipped)
Cup holders
Glove box
Door pocket
Console box
Coin holder
Storage compartment
386
3-6. Using the storage features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
387
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Glove box
Open (push button)
Unlock with the mechanical key
Lock with the mechanical key
■Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the headlight switch is on.
■Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 48)
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
388
3-6. Using the storage features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Console box
Pull up the lever to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
Lift the armrest to open.
■Console box light
The console box light turns on when the headlight switch is on.
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
389
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Overhead console (if equipped)
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in cause of an accident or sud-
den braking.
390
3-6. Using the storage features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Storage compartment
Coin holder
Pull up lever to release the lock.
Slide the armrest.
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not leave the storage compartment open.
The opened compartment may hit your body or items may be thrown out of the
compartment in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.
391
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Cup holders
Front
To open, press down and release
the cup holder lid.
Rear
To open, press in and release the
rear cup holder on the armrest.
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
392
3-6. Using the storage features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Door pockets
The front door pocket can be
opened and closed.
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
393
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position: Flip down.
Side position: Flip down,
unhook, and swing to the
side.
Side extender: Place in side
position, then slide back-
wards.
394
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vanity mirrors
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
395
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Clock
■The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
■Adjust clock
With navigation system
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Without navigation system
Press .
Touch “Clock” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “-”, “+” or “:00” (Rounds to the nearest hour).
Touch “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
396
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Outside temperature display
■The outside temperature is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When “--” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■On the multi-information display
P. 15 4
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F
(50°C).
397
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Ashtrays
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
Front
Slide the lid to open.
Push the lever to remove the
ashtray.
Push the lid to close.
Rear
Pull the lid to open.
Hold the plate down and pull the
ashtray upwards to remove.
398
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Cigarette lighter
■The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■To avoid burns or fires
●Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Slide the lid to open, and push
the cigarette lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when ready for use.
399
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Power outlet
■The power outlet can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is off.
The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than
10A.
400
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Seat heaters/ventilators
■The seat heaters/ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
: If equipped
The temperature of the seats can be adjusted individually.
■Seat heaters
Heats the seats
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
■Seat heaters/ventilators
Heats the seats
The indicator light (red) comes
on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
401
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the seat heaters/ventilators
Do not put heavy objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails,
etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is off.
402
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
Pull the armrest down for use.
403
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Rear sunshade
: If equipped
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by pressing the switch shown
below.
Raise/lower
404
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The rear sunshade can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Reverse operation feature
This function will become operational when the rear sunshade is in the raised posi-
tion and the vehicle has been driven at 9 mph (15 km/h) or more or with the shift
lever in P.
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the shift
lever is shifted to “R” and the function is in an operational condition.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
●Shift the shift lever into “P”.
●The shift lever is shifted out of “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h).
●The switch is pressed again.*
*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has
been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on
again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade
again, press the switch.
■After the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered for approximately 1 minute.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 62 0)
405
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is off.
■To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
●Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
●Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
●Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
●Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
●Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.
406
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Floor mats
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become diffi-
cult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver’s floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
For details, refer to the floor mat
retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
407
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the right place with all the provided retain-
ing hooks (clips). Be especially careful to
perform this check after cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift lever
in “P”, fully depress each pedal to the floor
to make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
408
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Trunk features
■Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■Shopping bag hooks
■First-aid kit storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
409
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Trunk storage extension
Pull down the rear armrest.
Open (push down the handle)
Unlock with the mechanical key
Lock with the mechanical key
■Luggage mat
Pull the lever upwards when lift-
ing the luggage mat up.
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
410
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While driving
●To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not
in use.
●Always keep the trunk storage extension door closed to reduce the chance of
injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.
NOTICE
■When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
411
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink®.
Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■Programming the HomeLink®
Point the remote control transmit-
ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink®
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
STEP 1
412
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the trans-
mitter button. When the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash after 20 seconds, release
both buttons.
Test the HomeLink® operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink® but-
ton. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink®indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
413
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Programming a Rolling Code system
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink® transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
414
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the sur-
face of the HomeLink®.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink® in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink® compatible trans-
ceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
Test the operation of the HomeLink® by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates cor-
rectly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink® button” instructions.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
415
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Operating the HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light on the HomeLink® transceiver should turn on.
The HomeLink® continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as
the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still press-
ing and holding the HomeLink® button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 20 seconds until the indi-
cator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
416
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLink® button.
■Certification for the garage door opener
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515
417
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
418
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Compass
: If equipped
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press the button for more than 3
seconds.
■Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
419
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will devi-
ate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold the switch.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
STEP 1
STEP 2
420
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Referring to the map above, press the switch to select the number
of the zone you are in.
Wait a few seconds until the compass direction is displayed.
The calibration is complete.
■Circling calibration
If “CAL” appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●The 12 volt battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
421
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not adjust the display.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neigh-
borhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
422
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Safety Connect
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to pro-
vide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is sup-
ported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is avail-
able at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
■System components
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Microphone
423
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency ser-
vice providers. (P. 425)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 426 )
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 426 )
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 426 )
■Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agree-
ment and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
424
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-
tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
●Safety Connect services will function in the United States, including Hawaii and
Alaska, and in Canada. The services will not function outside of the United
States in countries other than Canada. For details about the service, contact
your Lexus dealer.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
425
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service
is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage con-
ditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the response center. The responding
agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the
vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as
an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to
describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the loca-
tion.
426
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-
LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Con-
nect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehi-
cle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under cer-
tain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Con-
nect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
427
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect to be installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio
transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency
(RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards pre-
viously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-
tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evalua-
tions of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
428
3-7. Other interior features
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following
United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501
5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239
5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569
5,710,784 5,778,338
■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Maintenance and care 4
429
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 430
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 433
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements........................ 436
General maintenance.......... 438
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ................................ 441
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 442
Hood.......................................... 445
Positioning a floor jack ......... 446
Engine compartment ........... 448
Tires............................................ 463
Tire inflation pressure........... 473
Wheels....................................... 477
Air conditioning filter ............ 479
Electronic key battery.......... 482
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 484
Headlight aim ......................... 509
Light bulbs................................. 512
430
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-
tion.
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
431
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
●Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door is closed.
■High pressure washers
Do not allow the nozzles of the washers to come within close proximity of the win-
dows and fuel filler door.
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-
ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
432
4-1. Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components
(aluminum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash (with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
OFF
AUTO
433
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep
it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
■Synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
434
4-1. Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-
tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor or in the trunk.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 93 )
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
435
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm
water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running par-
allel to the heater wires.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
436
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular main-
tenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “War-
ranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
437
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure perfor-
mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■Hazardous materials
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
●12 volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 459 )
●Used engine oil contains chemicals that have been shown to cause cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact. Always protect your
skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
438
4-2. Maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid • At the correct level? (P. 457 )
Engine coolant • At the correct level? (P. 455)
Engine oil • At the correct level? (P. 451)
Exhaust system • No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses • Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 457)
Washer fluid • At the correct level? (P. 462)
12 volt battery • Maintenance-free (P. 459)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
439
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission
“Park” mechanism
• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an
incline with the shift lever in “P”?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance and
correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Pulls to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly? (P. 509 )
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on an
incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
440
4-2. Maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
441
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the oper-
ation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the 12 volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driv-
ing trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
442
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct proce-
dure given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
12 volt battery condition (P. 459 )
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 457 )
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 455)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene gly-
col based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
443
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level (P. 451)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P. 484) • Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim (P. 509) • Phillips-head screwdriver
Radiator and condenser (
P. 457)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 473 ) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 462 )
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
•Funnel
444
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-
denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the 12 volt battery.
Fuel and 12 volt battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the 12 volt battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 457)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
445
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Hood
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
STEP 1
STEP 2
446
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
447
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in “P”.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehi-
cle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
448
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Engine compartment
GS460
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 451)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 452)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 457)
Fuse box (P. 4 8 4)
Washer fluid tank (P. 462 )
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 455)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 457)
Radiator (P. 457 )
Fuse box (P. 4 8 4)
12 volt battery (P. 459)
449
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
GS350
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 451)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 452)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 457)
Fuse box (P. 4 8 4)
Washer fluid tank (P. 462 )
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 455)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 457)
Radiator (P. 457 )
Fuse box (P. 4 8 4)
12 volt battery (P. 459)
450
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the cover
Front
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
451
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Installing the clips
Push up center portion
Insert
Press
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
452
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
STEP 6
Engine oil
selection P. 588
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
453
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km). If the vehicle consumes more than this amount, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Resetting the engine oil maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
Perform the following steps:
Press the “DISP” switch (P. 153) to change the multi-information dis-
play to blank.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode with
the trip meter reset button held down.
Keep pressing the button for longer than 7 seconds after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
After the above operation, the message
shown in the left will appear on the display.
The master warning light and tone will turn
on. After 5 seconds, the system reset is com-
pleted.
454
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information con-
cerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
455
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
456
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator and reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■When adding the coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
457
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■Adding fluid
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
458
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
459
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
12 volt battery
Check the battery as follows.
■Exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
460
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow one or both of the following proce-
dures:
●After opening and closing the driver’s door, wait 10 seconds then attempt to
start the engine. (If the system does not start first time, repeat the procedure.)
●With the shift lever in “P” and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF, open
and close any door, then attempt to start the engine.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact
your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
461
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, seek
medical attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention imme-
diately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is on. Also, be sure all accessories are
turned off.
462
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch the fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
463
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Tires
Replace the tires when the treadwear indicators show.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the “TWI” or
“ ” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
inflation pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
■The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 5 37)
Front
464
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 466)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
●When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
●When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
465
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 596)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly three times and the mes-
sage “PRESSURE INITIAL”
appears on the multi-information
display.
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
466
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Registering and selecting ID codes
■Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new
set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
■Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to the
wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate
properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunc-
tion.
“MAIN”
“2nd”
467
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indi-
cate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a
speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
468
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, which-
ever is greater.
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-
mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow
tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All sea-
son tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as orig-
inal equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not
install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restric-
tion. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 21 8)
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 6 02)
469
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the system again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-
ing light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the
multi-information display.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
470
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est suscepti-
ble de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCG
IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J
IC ID: 1551A-13BCG
471
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
472
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■Low profile tires
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when
receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
●Avoid potholes, uneven pavements, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do
so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
474
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended lev-
els, adjust tire pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leak-
age.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
475
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
.
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every 2 weeks, or at least once a month.
If equipped, do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
476
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-
age, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
477
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using:
• Wheels of different sizes or types
• Used wheels
• Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
●After rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent when bal-
ancing your wheels.
478
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 464)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
479
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to main-
tain air conditioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
the outside air mode.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
Open the glove box and
remove the partition.
Remove the filter cover.
Press the tabs and remove the
filter case.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
480
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blow-
ing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 73
psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
■Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
481
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance sched-
ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Ser-
vices Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the system
●When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
●When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
482
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery (CR1632)
■Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
483
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your Lexus
dealer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■When the card key battery needs to be replaced
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can
cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.
●Do not bend the battery terminals.
484
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.
P. 45 0
Open the fuse box cover.
■Engine compartment
Type A
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Type B
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
485
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Front controller in the engine compartment fuse box
(engine compartment: type B)
Lift the lid off while pushing the
tabs on either side.
■Left side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
■Right side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
486
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Luggage compartment
Remove the cover.
■Luggage compartment (vehicles with active stabilizer suspension
system)
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 489) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
STEP 4
STEP 5
487
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appro-
priate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appro-
priate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
STEP 6
488
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
489
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment (Type A)
GS460
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1ECU-B 10 VGRS, EPS, driver’s seat switch
module
2ABS MAIN3 10 Electronically controlled
brake system
3TURN-HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, emergency flashers
4IG2 MAIN 20 IG2, GAUGE and IGN
5RAD NO.2 30 Audio system
6D/C CUT 20 DOME and MPX-B
7RAD NO.1 30 Audio system
490
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
8MPX-B 10
Multiplex communication system,
front controller, door control system
(power door lock system, door cour-
tesy lights, power windows, power
rear view mirror control system, out-
side rear view mirror heaters), power
seat system, steering sensors, elec-
tronically controlled brake system, tilt
and telescopic steering wheel,
gauges and meters, combination
switch
9DOME 10
Foot lights, vanity lights, gauges and
meters, steering spot light, steering
switch illumination, rear personal
lights, automatic transmission selec-
tor lever spot light, front personal
lights
10 CDS 10 Noise filter
11 ABS MAIN2 10 Electronically controlled
brake system
12 ABS MOTOR 30 ABS
13 ABS MAIN1 10 Capacitor
14 E/G-B 60 FR CTRL BATT, ETCS, ALT-S,
A/F HTR and INJ2
15 P/I-B 60 EFI NO.1, F/PMP and INJ
16 ABS1 50 VDIM
17 RH J/B-B 30 AM2, DOOR FR and DOOR RR
491
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
18 VGRS 40 VGRS
19 MAIN 30 H-LP R LWR and H-LP L LWR
20 STARTER 30 Starting system
21 LH J/B-B 30 FL DOOR, RL DOOR and RAD
NO.3
22 VVT 40 Electronic engine control system
23 EPS 80 EPS
24 ALT 180
RH J/B-AM, LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM,
RR JB, HEATER, DEFOG, FAN1,
FAN2, ABS2, ABS MOTOR,
ABS MAIN1, and ABS MAIN2
25 RH J/B-AM 80
AM1, OBD, STOP SW, TI & TE,
PWR OUTLET, FR P/SEAT RH,
STR LOCK, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG,
ACC, CIG, SECURITY,
FR S/HTR RH and AIR SUS
26 FAN3 80 Electric cooling fans
27 LH J/B-AM 80
S/ROOF, P/SEAT, TV, FL S-HTR,
ECU-IG L, WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG,
FUEL OPN, A/C, PANEL, LH-B and
TRK OPN
28 ABS2 30 ABS
29 DEFFOG 50 Rear window defogger, noise filter
30 CDS 40 CDS
492
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
31 FAN1 40 Electric cooling fans
32 HEATER 50 Air conditioning system
33 FAN2 40 Electric cooling fans
34 E/G-AM 60 H-LP CLN, FR CTRL ALT, A/C
COMP and STB-AM
35 RR J/B 80
STOP LP R, STOP LP L, RR-B,
RR TAIL, RR FOG, RR-IG1, PSB,
and RR S/SHADE
493
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
GS350
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1ECU-B 10 VGRS, EPS, driver’s seat switch
module
2ABS MAIN3 25 Electronically controlled
brake system
3TURN-HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, emergency flashers
4IG2 MAIN 20 IG2, GAUGE and IGN
5RAD NO.2 30 Audio system
6D/C CUT 20 DOME and MPX-B
7RAD NO.1 30 Audio system
8MPX-B 10
Multiplex communication system,
front controller, door control system
(power door lock system, door cour-
tesy lights, power windows, power
rear view mirror control system, out-
side rear view mirror heaters), power
seat system, steering sensors, elec-
tronically controlled brake system, tilt
and telescopic steering wheel,
gauges and meters, combination
switch
494
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
9DOME 10
Foot lights, vanity lights, gauges and
meters, steering spot light, steering
switch illumination, rear personal
lights, automatic transmission selec-
tor lever spot light, front personal
lights
10 CDS 10 Noise filter
11 ABS MAIN2 10
12 ABS MOTOR 30
13 ABS MAIN1 10
14 E/G-B 60 FR CTRL BATT, ETCS, ALT-S and
A/F HTR
15 ABS1 50 VDIM
16 RH J/B-B 30 AM2, DOOR FR and DOOR RR
17 VGRS 40 VGRS
18 MAIN 30 H-LP R LWR and H-LP L LWR
19 STARTER 30 Starting system
20 LH J/B-B 30 FL DOOR, RL DOOR and RAD
NO.3
21 P/I-B 60 EFI NO.1, F/PMP and INJ
22 EPS 80 EPS
23 ALT 150
RH J/B-AM, LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM,
RR JB, HEATER, DEFOG, FAN1,
FAN2, ABS2, ABS MOTOR,
ABS MAIN1, and ABS MAIN2
495
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
24 RR J/B 80
STOP LP R, STOP LP L, RR-B,
RR TAIL, RR FOG, RR-IG1, PSB,
and RR S/SHADE
25 GLW PLG1 50 Starting system
26 RH J/B-AM 80
AM1, OBD, STOP SW, TI & TE,
PWR OUTLET, FR P/SEAT RH,
STR LOCK, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG,
ACC, CIG, SECURITY,
FR S/HTR RH and AIR SUS
27 ABS2 30
28 DEFFOG 50 Rear window defogger, noise filter
29 CDS 40 CDS
30 FAN1 40
31 HEATER 50 Air conditioning system
32 GLW PLG2 50 Starting system
33 E/G-AM 60 H-LP CLN, FR CTRL ALT, A/C
COMP and STB-AM
34 LH J/B-AM 80
S/ROOF, P/SEAT, TV, FL S-HTR,
ECU-IG L, WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG,
FUEL OPN, A/C, PANEL, LH-B and
TRK OPN
35 FAN2 60 Electric cooling fans
496
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Engine compartment (Type B)
GS460
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1FR CTRL-B 25 H-LP UPR and HORN
2A/F 15 Exhaust system
3ETCS 10 Electronic throttle control system
4ALT-S 7. 5 Charging system
5INJ2 25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
6H-LP CLN 30 Headlight cleaner
7STB-AM 30
8DEICER 25
9FR CTRL-AM 30 FR TAIL, FR FOG and WASHER
497
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
10 IG2 10 Ignition system, noise filter and ECT
ECU
11 EFI NO.2 10
Fuel system, exhaust system, multi-
port fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, elec-
tronic engine control system, leak
detection pump
12 H-LP R LWR 15 Headlight low beam (right)
13 H-LP L LWR 15 Headlight low beam (left)
14 F/PMP 25 Fuel system
15 EFI 25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, ECT ECU
16 INJ 25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
17 H-LP UPR 15 Headlight high beams
18 HORN 10 Horns
19 WASHER 20 Windshield wipers and washer
20 FR TAIL 10 Parking lights, side marker light
21 FR FOG 15 Front fog lights
498
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
GS350
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1FR CTRL-B 25 H-LP UPR and HORN
2A/F 15 Exhaust system
3ETCS 10 Electronic throttle control system
4ALT-S 7. 5 Charging system
5H-LP CLN 30 Headlight cleaner
6A/C COMP 7.5 Air conditioning system
7DEICER 25
8FR CTRL-AM 30 FR TAIL, FR FOG and WASHER
9IG2 10 Ignition system and noise filter
10 EFI NO.2 10 Fuel system and exhaust system
499
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
11 H-LP R LWR 15 Headlight low beam (right)
12 H-LP L LWR 15 Headlight low beam (left)
13 F/PMP 25 Fuel system
14 EFI NO.1 25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
15 INJ 20
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
16 H-LP HI 15 Headlight high beams
17 HORN 10 Horns
18 WASHER 20 Windshield wipers and washer
19 FR TAIL 10 Parking lights, side marker light
20 FR FOG 15 Front fog lights
500
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Left side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1FR P/SEAT LH 30 Power seat system
2A/C 7.5 Air conditioning system
3TV 7.5 Audio system, air conditioning sys-
tem, rear view monitor system
4TRK OPN 10 Trunk lid opener
5LH-B 10
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
6S/ROOF 25 Moon roof
501
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
7PANEL 7.5
Steering switch illumination, audio
system, glove box light, automatic
transmission selector lever illumina-
tion, console box light, adaptive vari-
able suspension switch illumination,
cigarette lighter illumination, air con-
ditioning system, VSC OFF switch
illumination, driving pattern selector
switch, seat heater or heated and
ventilated seat switches, register ILL
RH, register ILL LH, fuel filler door
and trunk lid opener switch illumina-
tion, D-SW module
8FUEL OPN 10 Fuel filler door opener, trunk lid
opener
9ECU-IG LH 10
VDIM, electronically controlled
brake system, yaw rate and G sensor,
steering sensor, cruise control sys-
tem, dynamic radar cruise control
system, EPS, VGRS, rear view moni-
tor system, four-wheel drive system,
front controller, moon roof, rain sen-
sor
10 FR S/HTR LH 15 Seat heaters and ventilators
11 RR DOOR LH 20
Rear left door control system (power
door lock system, door courtesy light,
power window)
502
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
12 FR DOOR LH 20
Front left door control system (power
door lock system, power rear view
mirror control system, door courtesy
light, outside rear view mirror heater,
power window)
13 RAD NO.3 10 Audio system
14 H-LP LVL 7.5 AFS, automatic headlight leveling
control system
15 LH-IG 10
Charging system, headlight cleaners,
exhaust gas sensor, rear window
defogger, electric cooling fans, rear
left door control system, front left
door control system, emergency
flashers, automatic transmission, seat
belt pretensioners, Intuitive parking
assist, power window
16 FR WIP 30 Windshield wipers and washer
503
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Right side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1FR P/SEAT RH 30 Power seat system
2OBD 7.5 On-board diagnosis system
3STOP SW 7. 5
Stop/tail lights, multi-port fuel injec-
tion system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, starting system,
electronically controlled brake sys-
tem, Enhanced VSC system, shift
lock system, ECT ECU
4AM1 7.5
5TI & TE 20 Tilt and telescopic steering wheel,
multiplex communication system
6SECURITY 7.5 Smart access system with push-but-
ton start
7STR LOCK 25 Steering lock system
8GAUGE 7. 5 Gauges and meters
504
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
9IGN 10
Multi-port fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, SRS airbag system, stop/tail
lights, steering lock system, electroni-
cally controlled brake system, occu-
pant classification system ECU
10 ACC 7.5
Multiplex communication system,
smart access system with push-but-
ton start, rear view monitor system,
audio system, air conditioning system
11 CIG 15 Cigarette lighter
12 PWR OUTLET 15 Power outlet
13 AIR SUS 20 Adaptive variable suspension system
14 RR DOOR RH 20
Rear right door control system
(power door lock system, door cour-
tesy light, power window)
15 FR DOOR RH 20
Front right door control system
(power door lock system, power rear
view mirror control system, door
courtesy light, outside rear view mir-
ror heater, power window), multiplex
communication system
505
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Fuse Ampere Circuit
16 AM2 7.5 Starting system
17 RH-IG 7.5
Seat heater switches, front right door
control system, rear right door con-
trol system, capacitor, combination
switch, seat belt pretensioners, shift
lever switch, power window
18 FR S/HTR RH 15 Seat heaters and ventilators
19 ECU-IG RH 10
Tilt and telescopic steering, combina-
tion switch, multiplex communication
system, power seat, smart entry &
start system, air conditioning system,
audio system, shift lock system
506
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Luggage compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1RR S/SHADE 7.5 Rear sunshade
2PSB 30 Pre-collision seat belt
3RR-IG2 10
4RR-IG1 10 Pre-collision seat belt, seat belt pre-
tensioners, A/P UNIT, rear sunshade
5RR-B 10 Trunk light, noise filter
6RR FOG 7.5
7STOP LP L 10 Stoplights, back-up light
8STOP LP R 10 High mounted stoplights
9RR TAIL 10 Tail lights, license plate lights, rear
side marker lights
507
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Luggage compartment
(vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1STB FR 50 Front stabilizer
2STB RR 30 Rear stabilizer
3STB DC/DC 30 DC/DC converter
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 51 2 )
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
508
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
509
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Headlight aim
■Gauges
High beam vertical position
Low beam vertical position
High beam horizontal posi-
tion
Low beam horizontal position
510
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Adjustment bolts
High beam horizontal adjust-
ment
High beam vertical adjust-
ment
Low beam adjustment bolt A
Low beam adjustment bolt B
■Before checking the headlight aim
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
511
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Adjusting the headlight aim
Low beam (vertical adjustment)
Using a Phillips-head screw-
driver, turn adjustment bolt A so
that the bubble is within the 2
center lines.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1.
Low beam (horizontal adjustment)
Turn adjustment bolt A so that the red line on the gauge is in the middle
of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the gauge).
High beam (vertical and horizontal adjustment)
Turn each adjustment bolt in either direction so that the bubble in
within the 2 center lines (vertical), and the red line on the gauge is in
the middle of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the
gauge) (horizontal).
If you feel that there is a large deviation, have the headlight aim
adjusted at a Lexus dealer.
512
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Prepare a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 598)
■Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary
P. 45 0
■Front bulb locations
■Rear bulb locations
Parking light
Headlight high beam and
daytime running light
Rear turn signal light Back-up light
513
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight high beam and daytime running light
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise to remove it.
STEP 1
STEP 2
514
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Parking light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
515
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Back-up light
Open the trunk lid. Remove the
trunk handle and panel cover clips.
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn the bulb bases
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
516
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Rear turn signal light
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
517
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
●Headlight low beams (high-intensity discharge bulbs)
●Fog lights
●Front turn signal lights
●Front side marker lights
●Side turn signal lights
●Tail/stop lights
●Tail lights
●Rear side marker lights
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Tempo-
rary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■LED light bulbs
The side turn signal lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights, tail/stop lights and high
mounted stoplights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take
your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local
laws (SAE).
518
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
September 18, 2015 8:38 am
■High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
If voltage to the high-intensity discharge bulbs is insufficient, the light may not come
on, or may go out temporarily. The high-intensity discharge bulbs will come on
when normal power is restored.
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,
connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.
■High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
●Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing high-intensity discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).
●Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
death or serious injury by electric shock.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises 5
519
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.............. 520
If your vehicle needs
to be towed............................. 521
If you think something is
wrong..................................... 530
Fuel pump shut off
system...................................... 531
Event data recorder .............. 532
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds..................................... 534
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 544
If you have a flat tire
(Vehicles with standard
tires)........................................ 557
If you have a flat tire
(Vehicles with run-flat
tires)......................................... 567
If the engine will
not start.................................. 568
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”.................... 569
If you lose your keys .............. 570
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................... 571
If the 12 volt battery is
discharged ............................. 574
If your vehicle overheats ..... 578
If the vehicle becomes
stuck......................................... 581
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency............................ 582
520
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
5
When trouble arises
521
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your automatic transmission.
Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the wheels and axle on the ground must be in good
condition.
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
522
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehi-
cle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condi-
tion.
Towing eyelet
■Emergency towing procedure
Release the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in “N”.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in the ACCESSORY mode
(engine off) or the IGNITION ON mode (engine on).
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
523
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■While towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain. Always use caution for the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the automatic transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels (2WD models) or four
wheels (4WD models) on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the automatic transmission.
524
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installing towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
525
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 557
CAUTION
■Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead
to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
526
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
5
When trouble arises
527
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From rear (2WD models)
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to the ACCESSORY mode
so that the steering wheel is
unlocked.
From rear (4WD models)
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
528
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the automatic transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
●Do not tow the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
●When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle
could be damaged while being towed.
5
When trouble arises
529
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie-
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
530
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
5
When trouble arises
531
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is acti-
vated.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode or OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
STEP 1
STEP 2
532
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following infor-
mation:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the automatic transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●Driver’s seat position
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●Front passenger’s occupant classification
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record
data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
5
When trouble arises
533
5-1. Essential information
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
●An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
●Ordered by a court
However, if necessary Lexus will:
●Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed neces-
sary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
534
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be
dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
*1: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 550
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*1
•Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released, the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
535
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
(GS460)
ECB (Electronically controlled brake system) warning light
Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system.
Electric power steering system warning light
Malfunction in the EPS.
“PCS” warning light (if equipped)
Malfunction in the pre-collision system.
536
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Slip indicator
Malfunction in the Enhanced VSC.
The indicator will blink when Enhanced VSC, TRAC or hill-
start assist control is operational. (P. 200)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*2
A door or the trunk is not
fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
(Approximately 3.2 gal. [12
L, 2.6 Imp.gal.] or less)
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*3
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
5
When trouble arises
537
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
*2: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 549
*3: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12
mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in
a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
(on the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*3
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure warning system.
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
Take appropriate action in
accordance with the message
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
538
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is your vehicle low on gas?
If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in
the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the following:
●The airbag sensor assembly
●Front airbag sensors
●The curtain shield and rear side airbag sensors
●The side and curtain shield airbag sensors
●The front passenger occupant classification ECU
●“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
●The pressure sensor
●The belt tension sensor
●The seat belt buckle switches
●The driver’s seat position sensor
●The inflators
●The warning light
●The interconnecting wiring and power sources
5
When trouble arises
539
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Electric power steering system warning light
When the voltage is low or drops, the electric power steering system warning light
may come on.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
540
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
●If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
5
When trouble arises
541
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Vehicles with standard tires:
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation
pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is
flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest
Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
●Vehicles with run-flat tires:
• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive
over 55 mph (90 km/h).
• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by
the nearest Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
542
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
5
When trouble arises
543
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not operate properly.
544
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If a warning message is displayed
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Flashing)
Abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and per-
form the following actions:
Multi-information display
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following
actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
5
When trouble arises
545
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
Malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling sys-
tem.
Malfunction in the rear lights system.
(Flashing)
Malfunction in the steering lock system.
546
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning message Details
(AWD models)
Malfunction in the AWD system.
(If equipped)
Intuitive parking assist malfunction.
The malfunctioning sensor is shown flashing on the
display.
(If equipped)
Malfunction in the active stabilizer suspension sys-
tem.
(If equipped)
Malfunction in the PCS.
5
When trouble arises
547
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning message Details
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Malfunction in the radar cruise control system.
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
Malfunction in the charging system.
Malfunction in the power steering system.
Malfunction in the brake system.
Malfunction in the ABS.
548
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
(GS460)
Malfunction in the VGRS.
(If equipped, steering
guide symbol and
arrows are flashing)
The steering sensor cable is broken and signals can-
not be received.
5
When trouble arises
549
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message turns off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
One or more of the doors
is not fully closed.
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
The hood is not fully
closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the hood.
550
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning message Details Correction procedure
The trunk is not fully
closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the trunk.
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
The moon roof is not fully
closed (with the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is OFF and the
driver’s door opened).
Close the moon roof.
(Flashing)
The parking brake is still
engaged (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of more than 3 mph [5
km/h]).
Release the parking
brake.
The washer fluid level is
low. Add washer fluid.
The engine oil level is low. Check the engine oil level,
and add if necessary.
5
When trouble arises
551
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(U.S.A. only)
The engine oil should be
changed.
Check and change the
engine oil.
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km)
after the engine oil is
changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset).
(If equipped)
Intuitive parking assist is
dirty or covered with ice. Clean the sensor.
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
The PCS is not currently
functional.
• Clean the grille and the
sensor.
• This message appears
when the pre-collision
system is hot. In this case,
wait until the system
cools down.
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
The radar cruise control
sensor is dirty or covered
with ice.
Clean the sensor.
552
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
The radar cruise control
system is unable to judge
vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
• Turn the mode select
switch to either the nor-
mal or power mode.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to either the
intermittent or the slow
mode.
(If equipped, flashing)
Yo u r v e h i c l e i s n e a r i n g
the vehicle ahead (in
radar cruise mode).
Slow the vehicle by apply-
ing the brakes.
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Alerts the driver that
there is a high possibility
of collision or the pre-col-
lision braking has acti-
vated.
Depress the brake pedal.
■After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (P. 45 3)
■Approach warning message
In the following instances, there is the possibility that the approach warning will not
activate even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases.
●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle.
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at very low speed.
●Immediately after cruise control speed is set.
●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed.
5
When trouble arises
553
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Other messages
If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and confirm
that the message has disappeared.
Message Details
(If equipped)
Calibrate the neutral position of the steering wheel.
■Initializing the steering sensor
Use one of the following methods.
●With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right.
(The order is not important.)
●Drive for more than 5 minutes on an un-crowded road with as few curves and
corners as possible.
If the steering guide symbol disappears, the steering sensor has been initialized. If
the steering guide symbol does not disappear, have the vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
554
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light turn off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
(Comes on for 10 seconds)
(Flashing)
The electronic key
is not detected
when attempting
to start the
engine.
Confirm the
location of
the elec-
tronic key.
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
An open door
other than the
driver’s door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the detec-
tion range and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON
mode.
Confirm the
location of
the elec-
tronic key.
5
When trouble arises
555
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once 3 times
(Flashing)
The electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle
and the driver’s
door was opened
and closed with
the shift lever in P
without turning off
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch.
Tu r n t h e
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch to
OFF or con-
firm the
location of
the elec-
tronic key.
Contin-
uous
Contin-
uous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashing)
The electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle
and the driver’s
door was opened
and closed while
any shift position
other than P was
selected without
turning off the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
•Shift the
shift lever
to “P”.
•Confirm
the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
Once
(Comes on for 10 seconds)
(Flashing)
The electronic key
battery is low.
Replace the
battery.
(P. 482 )
556
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
An open door has
been closed and
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch has been
turned twice to
the ACCES-
SORY mode from
OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch while
applying the
brakes.
(Flashing)
The steering lock
has not released
within 3 seconds
of pressing the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch indicator
will flash green for
15 seconds.
Press the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch again
while turn-
ing the
steering
wheel with
the brake
pedal
depressed.
Once
(Comes on for 60 seconds)
The electronic key
does not operate
properly.
P. 571
(Comes on for 10 seconds)
5
When trouble arises
557
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to “P”.
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
Jack handle
Spare tire
Tighte n Loosen
Tools
Towing eyelet
558
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 596)
■Tre ad l i f e
The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up
to 3000 miles (4800 km) depending on road conditions and your driving habits.
When treadwear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (P. 463 )
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you
replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■Compact spare tire
The compact tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its
lighter weight helps to enhance fuel economy and permits easier
installation in case of a flat tire.
The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary emer-
gency use only.
5
When trouble arises
559
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Taking out the spare tire
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
Secure the panel using the hook
provided. Then take out the tool
tray.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
If the center fastener cannot be
turned by hand, use the wrench
that is stored in the trunk. (To
secure the tire, tighten the center
fastener by hand. Do not use the
wrench or other tools.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
560
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
STEP 1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
561
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
562
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel sheet.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Disc wheel
sheet
Tapered portion
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
563
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP 4
■If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps
and fit tire chains to the rear tires.
Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehi-
cle.
Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 464)
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
564
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may
cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel
damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
5
When trouble arises
565
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that your spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle.
Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use two spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
●ABS
●Brake assist
●Enhanced VSC
●TRAC
●EPS
●VGRS (GS460)
●VDIM
●Cruise control (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
●Navigation system (if equipped)
●Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
●Rear view monitor system (if equipped)
●Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped)
●AVS (if equipped)
566
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road sur-
faces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
5
When trouble arises
567
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with run-flat tires)
■In some condition (such as at high temperatures)
You can not continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).
■Spare tire
A spare tire is not provided on the vehicle with run-flat tires.
■If you cannot distinguish between standard tires and run-flat tires
Consult your Lexus dealer.
■For detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty book.
NOTICE
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as
soon as possible.
■Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)
You can continue driving the
vehicle with run-flat tires even if
any tire goes flat.
The vehicle is able to run for a
maximum of 100 miles (160 km)
at a speed below 55 mph (90
km/h) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on.
(P. 537 )
568
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 133), consider each of the following points.
■The engine will not start even if you are carrying the correct elec-
tronic key
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Add fuel to the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 133)
●There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 8 5)
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low vol-
ume
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The 12 volt battery may be discharged. (P. 574 )
●The 12 volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the 12 volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The 12 volt battery may be discharged. (P. 574 )
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
5
When trouble arises
569
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental opera-
tion of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override but-
ton.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
570
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using one of
the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
571
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked
functions
Doors
Using the mechanical key (P. 25)
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door.
Turning the key once again unlocks
the other doors.
Opens the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 33) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
572
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tr u n k
Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open.
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the
engine
Put the shift lever in “P” and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
To change the “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 13 4)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be operated, contact
your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
573
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to “P” and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 482 )
574
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the 12 volt bat-
tery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12 volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
Open the door using the mechanical key, then open the hood.
GS350: Remove the engine compartment covers.
Connect the jumper cables.
GS460
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
575
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
GS350
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the 12 volt battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is OFF.
Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
576
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Starting the engine when the 12 volt battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■When the 12 volt battery is removed or discharged
The intuitive parking assist must be initialized. (P. 553)
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
5
When trouble arises
577
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
CAUTION
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-
dling the battery:
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehi-
cle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●If the battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the
affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
578
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-
sides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 450)
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to
fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your Lexus dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
coolant level and inspect the
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
579
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Overheating
In the following situations, your vehicle may be overheating.
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and engine drive belt while the
engine is running.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency measure if coolant is
unavailable. (P. 592)
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
STEP 6
580
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
581
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-
ing area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the automatic transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and racing the engine.
●If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever
in “P”.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC/Enhanced VSC if these functions are hampering
your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 201)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
582
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to “N”.
If the shift lever is shifted to “N”
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to “N”
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehi-
cle speed as much as possible.
Stop the engine by pressing and
holding the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 3 consecutive
seconds or more.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 3
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP 4
STEP 5
Vehicle specifications 6
583
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 584
Fuel information..................... 599
Tire information...................... 602
6-2. Customization
Customizable features .......... 616
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.................... 622
584
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*:Unladen vehicle
Overall length 190.7 in. (4845 mm)
Overall width 71.6 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height*2WD 56.1 in. (1425 mm)
4WD 56.4 in. (1435 mm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tr e a d
Front 60.4 in. (1535 mm)
Rear
2WD
4WD
60.6 in. (1540 mm)
60.4 in. (1535 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 815 lb. (370 kg)
585
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Vehicle identification
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
586
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Engine number
GS460
GS350
The engine number is stamped on the location as shown.
587
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Engine
Fuel
GS460 GS350
Model 1UR-FSE 2GR-FSE
Typ e 8-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 281.2 cu.in. (4608 cm3)210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 Imp.gal.)
588
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Lubrication system
GS460
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the follow-
ing grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE 0W-
20 is the best choice for good fuel
economy and good starting in cold
weather.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
With filter
Without filter
9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp.qt.)
8.9 qt. (8.4 L, 7.4 Imp.qt.)
Outside temperature
589
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for
easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle
is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Com-
mittee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
590
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
GS350
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the follow-
ing grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
With filter
Without filter
2WD 4WD
6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)
6.7 qt. (6.4 L, 5.6 Imp.qt.)
6.3 qt. (6.0 L, 5.3 Imp.qt.)
Outside temperature
591
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for
easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle
is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Com-
mittee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
592
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity GS460 12.3 qt. (11.6 L, 10.2 Imp.qt.)
GS350 9.6 qt. (9.1 L, 8.0 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-
cate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate cool-
ant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make DENSO FK20HBR11
Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
593
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Electrical system
Differential
Rear differential: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your
Lexus vehicle at factory fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differen-
tial Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above spec-
ification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
12 volt battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8V Fully charged
12.2 12.4V Half charged
11.8 12.0V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5A max.
GS460/
GS350 (2WD)
GS350 (4WD)
Front Rear
Oil capacity 1.42 qt.
(1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)
0.74 qt.
(0.70 L, 0.61 Imp.qt.)
1.42 qt.
(1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
Toyota Genuine Dif-
ferential Gear Oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or
equivalent
Hypoid gear oil API
GL-5
Above 0°F (-18°C):
SAE 90
Below 0°F (-18°C):
SAE 80W or SAE
80W-90
Toyota Genuine Dif-
ferential Gear Oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or
equivalent
594
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Automatic transmission
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary,
contact your Lexus dealer.
Fluid capacity*
GS460 11.4 qt. (10.8 L, 9.5 Imp.qt.)
GS350 (2WD) 8.3 qt. (7.9 L, 7.0 Imp.qt.)
GS350 (4WD) 10.6 qt. (10.0 L, 8.8 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may
cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your automatic transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of
your vehicle.
595
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 196 N (20.0 kgf, 44
lbf) while the engine is running.
*2: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50.0 kgf,
110 lbf) while the engine is running.
*3: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6 kgf,
67.4 lbf).
Steering
Pedal clearance GS460 *12.9 in. (74 mm) Min.
GS350 *22.6 in. (65 mm) Min.
Pedal free play GS460 Less than 0.08 in. (2.0 mm)
GS350 0.04 0.08 in. (1.0 2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *37 9 clicks
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
596
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tires and wheels
Typ e A
Tire s ize
245/40R18 93Y, 245/40RF18 93Y,
P245/40R18 93V, P245/40RF18 93V,
245/40ZR18, T155/70D17 110M (spare)
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
km/h) (in countries where such speeds are per-
mitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the
maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated
on the tire sidewall.
Spare tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 8 J, 17 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
597
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Type B
Tire s ize
225/50R17 94W, P225/50R17 93V,
P225/50RF17 93V,
T155/70D17 110M (spare)
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
km/h) (in countries where such speeds are
permitted by law)
Add 7 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the
maximum cold tire inflation pressure indi-
cated on the tire sidewall.
Spare tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2 J, 17 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
598
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Light bulbs
A: D4S high-intensity discharge bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: HB4 halogen bulbs
F: Double end bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. WTy p e
Exterior
Headlights (low beam) D4S 35 A
Headlights (high beam) HB3 60 B
Front turn signal lights 21 C
Parking lights 5 D
Fog lights HB4 51 E
Front side marker light 194 5 D
Rear turn signal lights 21 C
Back-up lights 921 16 D
Trunk light 5 F
Interior Vanity lights 8 D
599
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Lexus dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gaso-
line with an significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can
lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher
octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
600
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygen-
ates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
●Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
601
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopen-
tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
taining MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-
ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
602
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire information
Typ i cal t ire sy m bo ls
603
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire size (P. 605)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 604)
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 463)
Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (P. 5 67 )
This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard
tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 609)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 6 09)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 468)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emer-
gency use only.
604
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
605
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
Ty p e A
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Speed category
(alphabet with one letter)
Run-flat tire code
Ty p e B
Ty p e C
606
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
607
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-
cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
608
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) trac-
tion.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
609
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a man-
ufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-
ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
610
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire related term Meaning
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (dis-
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
611
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire related term Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
612
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
613
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire related term Meaning
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-
ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
614
6-1. Specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Te s t r im The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tr e a d That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tre a d r i b A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tre a d s e p a ra t i o n Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
615
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat,
1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat,
1 in fourth seat
616
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart access
system with
push-button
start (P. 29 )
Smart access system with
push-button start ON OFF
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) ON OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer) ON OFF
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personal-
ized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires spe-
cialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
617
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Wireless
remote con-
trol (P. 4 1 )
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in 1-
step, all doors
unlocked
in 2-step
All doors
unlocked
in 1-step
Time elapsed before auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 seconds
OFF
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) ON OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer) ON OFF
Tr u n k u n l o c k i n g f u n c t i o n ON OFF
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold Push twice
One short push
Panic function ON OFF
Buzzer sounds when
pushing with any door
not closed
ON OFF
618
6-2. Customization
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Door lock
(P. 43)
Unlocking using a key
Driver’s door
unlocked in 1-
step, all doors
unlocked
in 2-step
All doors
unlocked
in 1-step
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function OFF ON
Opening driver’s door
unlocks all doors OFF ON
Shifting the shift lever to
“P” unlocks all doors ON OFF
Shifting the shift lever to
position other than “P”
locks all doors
ON OFF
Power win-
dows (P. 75 )
Linked door key opera-
tion Open and close Open only
Close only
Wireless remote control
linked operation OFF Open
619
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
*1: This function cannot be customized unless power window operation
using the wireless remote control is enabled.
*2: Vehicles sold outside Canada
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Moon roof
(P. 78 )
Linked door key opera-
tion Open and close Open only
Close only
Linked operation of com-
ponents when door key is
used
Slide only Tilt only
Wireless remote control
linked operation*1OFF Open
Linked operation of com-
ponents when wireless
remote control used*1
OFF
Slide only
Tilt only
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 155)
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Levels 1 to 5
Time elapse d be fore
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Daytime running light ON OFF*2
620
6-2. Customization
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Windshield
wipers and
washer
(P. 159)
Switching operation when
the vehicle is stationary ON OFF
Drip prevention function ON OFF
Time elapsed before the
drip prevention function
operates
Variab l e
depending on
the vehicle
speed
3 seconds
Illumination
(P. 382 )
Time elapsed before lights
turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked ON OFF
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF
ON OFF
Front/rear personal lights
turned on when a door is
opened
Corresponding
light only
All lights
OFF
Foot lights ON OFF
Shift lever light ON OFF
Outer foot light ON OFF
Front/rear personal lights
turned on when the inte-
rior lights are switched
“ON”
ON OFF
Rear sunshade
(P. 403)
Time elapsed before the
reverse operation feature
activates
0.7 seconds
0 seconds
0.9 seconds
1.2 seconds
622
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Intuitive parking assist
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 553
Engine oil maintenance
data • After changing engine oil P. 453
Tire pressure warning
system
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
• When changing the tire size.
P. 465
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
For owners 7
623
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................... 624
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 625
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 627
624
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-
free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
625
7
For owners
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
626
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
627
7
For owners
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
628
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
629
7
For owners
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
630
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
631
7
For owners
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
632
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
633
7
For owners
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
634
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 28, 2010 9:31 pm
636
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System
AFS Adaptive Front-lighting System
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
Enhanced VSC Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GPS Global Positioning System
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
INFO Information
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
MMT Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M + S Mud and Snow
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
637
Abbreviation list
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
PCS Pre-Collision System
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring (Warning) System
TRAC Traction Control
VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VGRS Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
638
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C ............................................................246
ABS.............................................................. 199
ACCESSORY mode .......................... 134
Active stabilizer suspension
system...................................................... 199
Adaptive variable
suspension system .............................198
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ....................... 479
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................................246
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions...........95
Airbag precautions for
your child...............................................99
Airbag warning light ........................535
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................................102
General airbag precautions ...........99
Locations of airbags............................ 92
Modification and disposal of
airbags.................................................. 103
Proper driving posture......................90
Side airbag precautions ....................99
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions .......................95
SRS airbags ............................................. 92
Alarm............................................................ 87
Antenna.................................................... 266
Anti-lock brake system........................199
Armrest ....................................................402
Ashtrays.................................................... 397
Audio input..............................................328
Audio system
Antenna.................................................. 266
Audio input........................................... 328
AUX port.............................................. 328
Bluetooth® audio..............................308
CD player/changer......................... 269
DVD information ...............................297
DVD player/changer .....................280
DVD video/audio.............................280
iPod............................................................316
MP3/WMA disc................................276
Optimal use ..........................................326
Portable music player..................... 328
Radio .......................................................260
Steering switches ...............................329
USB memory........................................316
Video CD..............................................294
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................157
Automatic light control system........ 155
Automatic transmission
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ...............................569
Mode select switch ............................138
S mode .....................................................139
AUX port.................................................328
A
639
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Back-up lights
Wattage .................................................598
Battery
12 volt battery ......................................459
Checking...............................................459
If the 12 volt battery is
discharged ........................................ 574
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................218
Bluetooth® audio.................................308
Bluetooth® phone ............................... 332
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 457
Parking brake........................................143
Brake assist...............................................199
Care
Exterior...................................................430
Interior..................................................... 433
Seat belts ............................................... 434
Cargo capacity .......................................213
Cargo hooks.......................................... 408
CD player/changer .............................269
Chains.........................................................219
Child-protectors ......................................44
Child restraint system
Definition..................................................109
Installation..................................................113
Installing CRS with lower
anchors ...................................................114
Installing CRS with seatbelts ...........116
Installing CRS with top straps.......120
Child safety
Airbag precautions..............................99
Battery precautions ............. 460, 577
Child restraint system.......................109
Child-protectors...................................44
How your child should wear
the seatbelt............................................66
Installing child restraints.....................113
Moon roof precautions....................... 81
Power window lock switch..............75
Power window precautions ............75
Removed electronic key battery
precautions....................................... 483
Seat belt comfort guide .....................64
Seat belt precautions ..........................67
Seat heater precautions.................. 401
Trunk precautions................................ 50
Cigarette lighter................................... 398
Cleaning
Exterior................................................... 430
Interior .....................................................433
Seat belts................................................434
Clock .........................................................395
Coin holder.............................................390
Compass ...................................................418
Condenser ..............................................457
Console box .......................................... 388
Cooling system
Engine overheating.......................... 578
Cruise control
Cruise control.......................................165
Dynamic radar cruise control....... 169
Cup holders ............................................. 391
Curtain shield airbags............................ 92
Customizable features........................ 616
B
C
640
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Daytime running light system ........... 156
Defogger
Rear window........................................255
Side mirror............................................255
Dimension............................................... 584
Dinghy towing........................................224
Display
Multi-information display.................152
Touch screen.......................................228
Trip information....................................153
Warning message.............................544
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............442
Door courtesy lights ............................382
Door pocket............................................392
Doors
Door lock...................................29, 41, 43
Rear door child protector................ 44
Driver’s seat belt reminder light .....536
Driver’s seat position memory ...........55
Driving
Correct posture....................................90
Procedures.............................................124
DVD player/changer......................... 280
Electric power steering....................... 199
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly......................571
Replacing battery ..............................482
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on.............. 534
If a warning message is
displayed............................................ 544
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .....................571
If the engine will not
start .......................................................568
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ...............................569
If the 12 volt battery is
discharged ........................................574
If you have a flat tire ............557, 567
If you lose your keys ........................ 570
If you think something is
wrong ..................................................530
If your vehicle becomes stuck ......581
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency ............................ 582
If your vehicle needs to be
towed...................................................520
If your vehicle overheats................ 578
Engine
ACCESSORY mode....................... 134
Compartment..................................... 448
Engine (ignition) switch....................133
Hood ....................................................... 445
How to start the engine ................... 133
If the engine will not start...............568
Overheating ........................................ 578
Engine compartment cover.............450
Engine coolant temperature
gauge .......................................................145
D
E
641
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Engine coolant
Capacity................................................. 592
Checking...............................................455
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................218
Engine oil
Capacity................................................ 588
Checking.................................................451
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................218
Engine oil maintenance data........... 453
Engine (ignition) switch .......................133
Enhanced vehicle stability
control .....................................................199
Event data recorder............................ 532
First-aid kit storage belt.....................408
Floor mats................................................ 406
Fluid
Brake ....................................................... 457
Washer................................................... 462
Fog lights
Switch....................................................... 158
Wattage .................................................598
Foot light.................................................. 382
Front passenger occupant
classification system ..........................104
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light......................................537
Front seats
Adjustment .............................................. 53
Driver’s seat position memory ......55
Front turn signal lights
Wattage .................................................598
Fuel
Capacity................................................ 587
Fuel gauge.............................................. 145
Gas station information..................652
Information........................................... 599
Refueling....................................................82
Fuel door .....................................................82
Fuel filler door ...........................................82
Fuses ..........................................................484
Garage door opener .............................411
Gas station information......................652
Gauges ...................................................... 145
Glove box................................................387
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ..........................332
Head restraints .........................................60
Headlight aim........................................ 509
Headlight cleaner.................................. 164
Headlights
Adaptive front lighting system......156
Discharge headlights
precautions.........................................518
Replacing light bulbs......................... 512
Switch........................................................155
Wattage.................................................598
Heaters
Seat heaters .........................................400
Side mirror.............................................255
Hill-start assist control ......................... 199
Hood..........................................................445
Hooks
Cargo .....................................................408
Shopping bag.....................................408
Horn ............................................................ 144
F
G
H
642
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Identification
Engine .................................................... 586
Vehicle................................................... 585
Ignition switch
Engine switch.........................................133
Illuminated entry system ....................382
I/M test....................................................... 441
Immobilizer system.................................85
Indicator lights......................................... 149
Initialization
Items to initialize................................. 622
Inside rear view mirror ............................71
Instrument panel light control........... 146
Interior lights
Interior lights.........................................383
Wattage................................................. 598
Intuitive parking assist............................181
Jack
Positioning a floor jack....................446
Vehicle-equipped jack...................557
Jack handle..............................................557
Keyless entry............................................... 41
Keys
Engine (ignition) switch....................133
If the electronic key does
not operate properly......................571
If you lose your keys.........................570
Key number plate..................................24
Keys..............................................................24
Mechanical key...................................... 25
Wireless remote control key............ 41
Lexus Link System................................ 422
Light bulbs
Replacing ................................................512
Wattage.................................................598
Light sensitive optitron meter............147
Lights
Fog light switch ....................................158
Headlights switch................................155
Interior lights list ................................. 382
Replacing light bulbs......................... 512
Turn signal lever................................... 142
Vanity lights.......................................... 394
Wattage.................................................598
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance..........442
General maintenance.....................438
Maintenance data.............................584
Maintenance requirements.......... 436
Meter
Instrument panel light control.......146
Meters.......................................................145
Micro dust and pollen filter ................251
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .........................71
Side mirror heater............................. 255
Side mirrors..............................................73
Vanity mirrors..................................... 394
Moon roof................................................... 78
MP3 disc.................................................. 276
Multi-information display....................152
I
J
K
L
M
643
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Noise from under the vehicle ..............18
Odometer.................................................145
Oil
Engine oil.................................................451
Opener
Fuel filler door ........................................ 82
Hood ....................................................... 445
Trunk........................................................... 48
Outer foot lights ................................... 382
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding..........................73
Mirror position memory...................55
Outside temperature
display.......................................... 154, 396
Overhead console .............................. 389
Overheating, Engine.......................... 578
Parking brake ..........................................143
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs .........................512
Switch........................................................155
Wattage .................................................598
Personal lights ....................................... 384
Portable music player ........................ 328
Power outlet........................................... 399
Power windows.........................................75
Pre-collision system............................ 206
Radar cruise control............................. 169
Radiator ....................................................457
Radio..........................................................260
Radio data system ................................262
Rear sunshade .......................................403
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 512
Wattage.................................................598
Rear view monitor system.................. 194
Rear window defogger ......................255
Replacing
Electronic key battery......................482
Fuses........................................................ 484
Light bulbs.............................................. 512
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners..........................................624
Safety Connect...................................... 422
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................63
Automatic locking retractor............66
Child restraint system
installation.............................................. 113
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................434
Emergency locking retractor..........66
How to wear your seat belt.............63
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................66
Pre-collision seat belts .......................65
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use.........................66
Reminder light .................................... 536
Seat belt extenders ..............................67
Seat belt pretensioners......................65
N
O
P
R
S
644
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Seat heaters/ventilators......................401
Seating capacity......................................217
Seats
Adjustment............................................... 53
Adjustment precautions....................54
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............................113
Cleaning.................................................433
Driver’s seat position memory.......55
Head restraint.........................................60
Properly sitting in the seat................90
Seat heaters......................................... 400
Service reminder indicators ............. 149
Shift lever
Automatic transmission....................137
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”................................569
Shift lock system....................................569
Shopping bag hooks........................... 408
Side airbags................................................92
Side marker lights
Switch ....................................................... 155
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding ..........................73
Mirror position memory ...................55
Smart access system with
push-button start
Antenna location.....................................31
Entry function.......................................... 29
Starting the engine..............................133
Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................596
Storage location................................ 558
Spark plug................................................592
Specifications ........................................ 584
Speedometer........................................... 145
Steering wheel
Adjustment...............................................70
Audio switches....................................329
Steering wheel position
memory ................................................. 55
Storage compartment........................390
Storage feature .....................................385
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck ......581
Sun visors.................................................393
Switch
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch..................................................... 133
Fog light switch ....................................158
Ignition switch .......................................133
Light switches........................................155
Mode select switch ............................138
Power door lock switch.....................43
Power window switch ........................75
Tire pressure warning
reset switch....................................... 464
Tire pressure
warning select switch ..................466
Window lock switch............................75
Wipers and washer switch.............159
Tachometer ..............................................145
Tail lights
Switch........................................................155
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...........................................................87
Immobilizer system ............................. 85
Tire inflation pressure.........................596
T
645
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Tire information
Glossary ................................................609
Size ...........................................................605
Tire identification number.............604
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...607
Tires
Chains.......................................................219
Checking............................................... 463
Compact spare tire..........................558
If you have a flat tire..............557, 567
Inflation pressure ...............................596
Information............................................602
Replacing............................................... 557
Rotating tires........................................463
Size ...........................................................596
Snow tires................................................ 221
Tire pressure warning system..... 463
Tools ...........................................................557
Total load capacity................................. 217
Touch screen ......................................... 228
Towing
Dinghy towing......................................224
Emergency towing........................... 522
Trailer towing........................................223
Traction control ......................................199
Trip meter..................................................145
Trunk
Opener...................................................... 48
Trunk light .................................................49
Wattage .................................................598
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .........................512
Switch........................................................ 142
Wattage .................................................598
Vanity lights
Vanity lights ..........................................394
Wattage.................................................598
Vanity mirrors ........................................394
Variable gear ratio steering............ 200
Vehicle dynamics
integrated management................ 200
Vehicle identification number........ 585
Vehicle load limits ..................................217
Ventilators .............................................. 400
Warning buzzers
Brake system........................................534
Downshifting ......................................... 140
Open door .......................................... 536
Seat belt reminder............................ 536
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system.................. 535
Brake system........................................534
Charging system................................534
Electric power steering
warning light .................................... 535
Electronically
controlled brake system ............ 535
Low fuel level ...................................... 536
Malfunction indicator lamp.......... 535
Master warning light.........................537
Open door........................................... 536
Pre-collision system......................... 535
Seat belt reminder light.................. 536
SRS airbags.......................................... 535
Tire pressure warning light...........537
V
W
646
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
Warning messages
Anti-lock brake system...................535
Brake assist...........................................535
Charging system ...............................534
Dynamic radar
cruise control ...................................547
Engine oil level................................... 550
Engine oil maintenance................... 551
Engine oil pressure...........................544
Headlight ...............................................545
Hood........................................................549
Intuitive parking
assist.............................. 546, 551, 553
Moon roof............................................ 550
Open door ...........................................549
Parking brake..................................... 550
Pre-collision system..............546, 551
Rear lights system..............................545
Smart access system with
push-button start............................554
Steering lock...............535, 545, 556
Trunk....................................................... 550
VGRS......................................................548
Washer fluid........................................ 550
Washer
Checking................................................462
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................218
Switch........................................................159
Washing and waxing...........................430
Weight
Cargo capacity .................................... 213
Load limits................................................217
Weight....................................................584
Wheels.......................................................477
Window glasses ...................................... 43
Window lock switch............................... 43
Windows
Power windows.....................................75
Rear window defogger..................255
Washer.....................................................159
Windshield wipers
Position................................................... 220
Windshield wipers..............................159
Windshield wiper de-icer .................256
Winter driving tips................................. 218
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking................................41
Replacing the battery...................... 482
WMA disc............................................... 276
647
Alphabetical index
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
648
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 557 /
567 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 8 5 Immobilizer system
P. 56 8 If the engine will not start
P. 574 If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 569
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from “P”
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 578 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 570 If you lose your keys
The 12 volt battery runs out
P. 574 If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 4 3 Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 87 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 58 1 If the vehicle becomes stuck
649
What to do if...
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 5 3 4 If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
or or
P. 53 4 P. 535
P. 536
or
P. 535 P. 5 37
P. 535 P. 5 37
P. 536 P. 535
P. 535 P. 535
P. 536 P. 53 6
P. 53 4 P. 537
*: Electronically Controlled Brake
System
Brake system warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
ABS warning light
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
ECB* warning light
Tire pressure warning light
Low fuel level warning light
Electric power steering
warning light
SRS warning light
Pre-collision system warn-
ing light
Open door warning light
Slip indicator
Charging system warning
light
Master warning light
651
What to do if...
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
652
GS_G_U (OM30C11U)
May 21, 2010 1:06 pm
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 4 45
Trunk opener
P. 48
Fuel filler door
P. 82
Hood lock release lever
P. 4 45
Fuel filler door opener
P. 82
Tire inflation pressure
P. 596
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only P. 83, 587
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 596
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
With filter
Without filter
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
GS460 GS350 (2WD) GS350 (4WD)
9.1 (8.6, 7.6) 6.6 (6.3, 5.5) 6.7 (6.4, 5.6)
8.9 (8.4, 7.4) 6.2 (5.9, 5.2) 6.3 (6.0, 5.3)
Engine oil type “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 588
